Broadgate Bg-30: Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual

BroadGate® BG-30
Version 13
Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance Manual
426006-2333-013-A03
BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual
V13
Catalog No: X38446
January 2011
st
1 Edition
© Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2002-2011. All rights reserved worldwide.

This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (“ECI Telecom”). BY OPENING THE
DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE
UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING
WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED THEM.
The information contained in the documentation and/or disk is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright,
patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's
rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained in the documentation and/or
disk may be published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express prior
written permission of ECI Telecom. In addition, any use of this document, the documentation and/or the disk, or the
information contained therein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed, is strictly forbidden.
ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or
specifications. Information supplied by ECI Telecom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility whatsoever is assumed by ECI Telecom for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, which
may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof.
Any representation(s) in the documentation and/or disk concerning performance of ECI Telecom product(s) are for
informational purposes only and are not warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied.
ECI Telecom's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty
offered by ECI Telecom.
The documentation and/or disk is provided “AS IS” and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No
warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained in the documentation and in the disk is periodically updated,
and changes will be incorporated in subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify ECI
Telecom. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by
all relevant copyright, patent, and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must
treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other copyrighted material (for example, a
book or musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of the documentation and disk, as
applicable. YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR
ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT
EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI Telecom.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever
caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with this documentation and/or disk, the information contained
therein, its use, or otherwise. Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim
and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special, incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise
in respect of the documentation and/or disk and/or the information contained therein, howsoever caused, even if
advised of the possibility of such damages.
The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines"
instructions and that such instructions were understood by them.
It is hereby clarified that ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage
whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failed to fulfill
in whole or in part the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.
Contents
About This Manual .................................................................. xiii
Overview ........................................................................................................... xiii
Intended Audience ............................................................................................ xiii
Document Organization ..................................................................................... xiii
Document Conventions ..................................................................................... xiv
Related Documentation ...................................................................................... xv
Obtaining Technical Documentation .................................................................. xv
Technical Assistance......................................................................................... xvi
Introduction.............................................................................. 1-1
BG-30 Platform Overview ................................................................................. 1-1
Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 2-1
Site Preparation................................................................................................ 2-4
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-6
Installation of BG-30 in Racks .......................................................................... 2-7
Preparing Cables and Fibers .......................................................................... 2-10
Work and Equipment Safety ........................................................................... 2-17
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge .................................................... 2-23
Equipment Installation ............................................................ 3-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Preparations .................................................................................. 3-2
Installation Sequence ....................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................... 3-5
Installation Options ........................................................................................... 3-6
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ..................................................................... 3-8
Installing the BG-30B Shelf in the Rack ......................................................... 3-32
Installing the BG-30E Shelf in the Rack ......................................................... 3-50
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-30 Shelf ........................................ 3-65
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary i

Contents BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
BG-30B Wall-Mounted Installations ....................................... 4-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-2
Wall-Mounted Cabinet ...................................................................................... 4-2
Installing the BG-30B in a Wall-Mounted Cabinet ............................................ 4-3
Installing the Interior Components .................................................................... 4-4
Installing Cabling Accessories ........................................................................ 4-10
DDF 21 E1s Unit ............................................................................................ 4-14
Installing the BG-30B and Three DDFs .......................................................... 4-18
Installing the BG-30B, Two DDFs, and an AC CONV Unit ............................. 4-21
Connecting Cabinet Grounding ...................................................................... 4-24
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the Cabinet ........................... 4-24
Installing the Wall-Mounted Cabinet Covers and Door .................................. 4-33
Wall-Mounted Frame ...................................................................................... 4-37
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame ................................................................. 4-38
Installing the BG-30B and Accessories in the Wall-Mounted Frame .............. 4-42
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame Front Cover ............................................. 4-51
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame Grounding ................................................. 4-53
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the Frame ............................. 4-54
Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 5-1
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 5-1
Site Commissioning Tests ................................................................................ 5-2
SDH Commissioning Tests .............................................................................. 5-6
Data Network Commissioning Tests .............................................................. 5-13
Maintenance ............................................................................. 6-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 6-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................. 6-1
Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................... 6-2
Onsite Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 6-3
Troubleshooting Power Problems .................................................................... 6-4
Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators ................................................. 6-6
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 6-25
ii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Contents
Maintenance Manual
Connection Data ..................................................................... A-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... A-2
INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E DC Input Power Connectors ............................ A-2
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E AC Input Power Connectors ....................... A-2
MNG Ethernet Connector ................................................................................. A-3
T3/T4 Timing Connector................................................................................... A-4
Auxiliary Connector on the MCP30 .................................................................. A-5
RS-232 Connector............................................................................................ A-7
Orderwire Connector ........................................................................................ A-8
V.11 Overhead Connector ................................................................................ A-9
Alarms Connector........................................................................................... A-10
E1 Connectors on the PME1_21 .................................................................... A-11
PME1_63 Connection Data ............................................................................ A-15
Ethernet Interface Connectors ....................................................................... A-23
PM345_3 Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-23
P345_3E Card Connection Data .................................................................... A-23
PE1_63 Card Connection Data ...................................................................... A-23
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data ......................................................... A-24
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection Data .............................................................. A-24
DMGE_1_L1 Connection Data ....................................................................... A-25
TP21_2 Connection Data ............................................................................... A-25
TP63_1 Connection Data ............................................................................... A-30
TPS1_1 Connection Data ............................................................................... A-30
SM_10E Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-30
ICP_VF Connection Data ............................................................................... A-41
ICP_V24 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-43
ICP_V35 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-45
RAP-4B Connectors ....................................................................................... A-46
Rack Installation ..................................................................... B-1

Installing Equipment Racks .............................................................................. B-1
19" Rack Installation ......................................................................................... B-7
Index .......................................................................................... I-1
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iii

Contents BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
iv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Typical BG-30 shelf ..................................................................................... 1-2
Figure 2-1: Typical installation of four BG-30 shelves in an ETSI 2200 rack ................ 2-9
Figure 2-2: Laser warning label.................................................................................... 2-20
Figure 2-3: Basic ESD warning symbol ....................................................................... 2-23
Figure 3-1: Typical installation of a single BG-30 shelf in a 2200 ETSI rack ................. 3-3
Figure 3-2: Typical installation of four BG-30B shelves ................................................. 3-7
Figure 3-3: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud ......................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-4: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes ....................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-5: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG ........................................... 3-11
Figure 3-6: RAP-BG shelf power cable grounding screws .......................................... 3-13
Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front cover removal ..................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG circuit breakers installation ......................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-9: Shelf DC input power connector pin functions .......................................... 3-15
Figure 3-10: Location of RAP-4B grounding stud ........................................................ 3-17
Figure 3-11: Identification of RAP-4B cable routes ...................................................... 3-18
Figure 3-12: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B .......................................... 3-18
Figure 3-13: RAP-4B shelf power cable grounding screws ......................................... 3-20
Figure 3-14: RAP-4B front cover removal .................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-15: RAP-4B circuit breakers installation ........................................................ 3-21
Figure 3-16: Shelf DC input power connector pin functions ........................................ 3-22
Figure 3-17: Threading optical fibers in the FST.......................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-18: Attaching rack mounting brackets to the ODF......................................... 3-25
Figure 3-19: ODF front panel ....................................................................................... 3-26
Figure 3-20: ODF open view ........................................................................................ 3-26
Figure 3-21: ODF fiber routes ...................................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-22: Installing ICP_MCP30 in the rack ............................................................ 3-29
Figure 3-23: Installing SM_10E ICPs in the rack ......................................................... 3-30
Figure 3-24: Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack .............................................. 3-31
Figure 3-25: Installing the rail stiffeners in the rack ..................................................... 3-33
Figure 3-26: BG-30B slots............................................................................................ 3-35
Figure 3-27: Installing a power module in the BG-30B ................................................ 3-37
Figure 3-28: Installing an FCU_30B/ FCU_30BH module in the BG-30B ................... 3-38
Figure 3-29: Location of the SD card inside the MCP30 ............................................. 3-39
Figure 3-30: Installing the SD card into the MCP30B .................................................. 3-40
Figure 3-31: Installing an MCP30B module in the BG-30B ......................................... 3-41
Figure 3-32: Location of the SD card inside the MCP30 ............................................. 3-42
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary v

List of Figures BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-33: Installing the SD card into the MCP30B .................................................. 3-43
Figure 3-34: Location of the CF card inside the MCP30B/D........................................ 3-44
Figure 3-35: Installing a CF card into the MCP30B/D .................................................. 3-44
Figure 3-36: Installing an MCP30B module in the BG-30B ......................................... 3-45
Figure 3-37: Installing an XIO30 module in the BG-30B.............................................. 3-46
Figure 3-38: Installing a Tslot module in the BG-30B .................................................. 3-47
Figure 3-39: Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in the AC_CONV_UNIT ................... 3-48
Figure 3-40: Installing an SFP/XFP module in the BG ................................................ 3-49
Figure 3-41: Installing the H connector ........................................................................ 3-51
Figure 3-42: Installing the BG-30E ............................................................................... 3-52
Figure 3-43: Removing the BG-30E from the BG-30B ................................................ 3-53
Figure 3-44: Inserting the thin flat-head tool ................................................................ 3-54
Figure 3-45: Raising the rivet cap ................................................................................ 3-54
Figure 3-46: Removing the rivet ................................................................................... 3-54
Figure 3-47: BG-30E regular slots layout..................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3-48: BG-30E slots layout with ES 3# extended ............................................... 3-55
Figure 3-49: Installing the power module in the BG-30E ............................................. 3-57
Figure 3-50: Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E ..................................................... 3-58
Figure 3-51: Installing an extension card in the BG-30E ............................................. 3-59
Figure 3-52: Removing the blank panel ....................................................................... 3-60
Figure 3-53: Removing the card guide......................................................................... 3-61
Figure 3-54: Installing a TP63_1 card in the BG-30E .................................................. 3-62
Figure 3-55: Installing a traffic module on the SM_10E ............................................... 3-64
Figure 3-56: PME1_63 traffic cable ............................................................................. 3-71
Figure 3-57: PME1_63 traffic cable installation ........................................................... 3-72
Figure 3-58: L114 protection jumper cable schematic diagram ................................... 3-75
Figure 3-62: TP21_2 1:2 protection scheme example ................................................. 3-79
Figure 3-63: TP21_2 1:1 protection scheme example ................................................. 3-80
Figure 3-64: TP63_1_1 (two PE1_63 cards) 1:1 protection scheme example ............ 3-80
Figure 3-65: TP63_1_1 (three PME1_21 modules and one PE1_63 card)
1:1 protection scheme example ................................................................................... 3-81
Figure 3-66: TPS1_1 (two SMQ1&4 modules) 1:1 protection scheme example ......... 3-81
Figure 4-1: Wall-mounted cabinet general view............................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-2: Tools required for cabinet installation .......................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-3: Wall-mount cabinet interior parts ................................................................. 4-4
Figure 4-4: Preparing the rear panel holes .................................................................... 4-5
vi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and List of Figures
Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-5: Installing the rear panel ............................................................................... 4-6

Figure 4-6: Installing the support rails ............................................................................ 4-7
Figure 4-7: Installing the 19" vertical extrusions ............................................................ 4-8
Figure 4-8: Installing the C-Rail...................................................................................... 4-9
Figure 4-9: Accessories installation ............................................................................. 4-10
Figure 4-10: Cabling accessories ................................................................................ 4-11
Figure 4-11: DDF general view .................................................................................... 4-14
Figure 4-12: Installing the brackets for ETSI installation ............................................. 4-15
Figure 4-13: Attaching the connection blocks .............................................................. 4-16
Figure 4-14: Installing a BG shelf and three DDFs ...................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-15: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG and three DDFs) ...................................... 4-19
Figure 4-16: Installing a BG shelf, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit ......................... 4-21
Figure 4-17: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG, two DDFs, AC CONV unit) ..................... 4-22
Figure 4-18: Wall-mounted cabinet cabling ................................................................. 4-25
Figure 4-19: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing front view ...................................... 4-26
Figure 4-20: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing left side view................................. 4-27
Figure 4-21: Installing top and bottom covers .............................................................. 4-33
Figure 4-22: Connecting grounding cables .................................................................. 4-34
Figure 4-23: Installing side covers ............................................................................... 4-35
Figure 4-24: Connecting grounding cables .................................................................. 4-35
Figure 4-25: Installing the front door ............................................................................ 4-36
Figure 4-26: Connecting the door grounding cable ..................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-27: Wall-mounted frame installation .............................................................. 4-39
Figure 4-28: Attaching the fiber guide tube .................................................................. 4-40
Figure 4-29: Holes location for wall-mounted frame .................................................... 4-41
Figure 4-30: Installing a BG and three DDFs ............................................................... 4-43
Figure 4-31: Installing a BG, a DDF, and a RAP-BG ................................................... 4-44
Figure 4-32: Installing an BG, a ICP_MCP30, and a DDF........................................... 4-46
Figure 4-33: Installing a BG, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV ........................................ 4-48
Figure 4-34: Installing a BG and a DDF ....................................................................... 4-50
Figure 4-35: Installing the front cover .......................................................................... 4-52
Figure 4-36: Routing and connecting cables and fibers in the wall-mounted frame .... 4-54
Figure 4-37: Wall-mounted frame cable routing - left side view................................... 4-55
Figure 6-1: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an XIO module ............................. 6-33
Figure A-1: POWER IN input power connector, pin functions ....................................... A-2
Figure A-2: AC input power connector ........................................................................... A-2
Figure A-3: Ethernet connector, PIN identification ......................................................... A-3
Figure A-4: T3/T4 connector, pin identification .............................................................. A-4
Figure A-5: Auxiliary connector for MCP30/MCP64, pin identification .......................... A-5
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vii

List of Figures BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification ......................................... A-7

Figure A-7: RS-232 overhead cable .............................................................................. A-7
Figure A-8: RS-232 overhead cable label ...................................................................... A-7
Figure A-9: OW connector, pin identification ................................................................. A-8
Figure A-10: V.11 connector, pin identification .............................................................. A-9
Figure A-11: Alarms connector, pin identification ........................................................ A-10
Figure A-12: E1 connectors for PME1_21, pin identification ....................................... A-11
Figure A-13: PME1_63 connector pin identification ..................................................... A-15
Figure A-14: E1 connectors for TP21_2, pin identification .......................................... A-25
Figure A-15: SM_10E traffic module connector, pin identification ............................... A-30
Figure A-16: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ..................................... A-43
Figure A-17: 9-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ....................................... A-44
Figure A-18: M34 female connector, pin identification ................................................. A-45
Figure A-19: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin identification ............................. A-46
Figure A-20: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification ............................. A-48
Figure B-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks .............................................................. B-4
Figure B-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks ................................................... B-5
Figure B-3: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead
tray (2200 mm rack) ....................................................................................................... B-6
Figure B-4: Example of an approved European 19” rack .............................................. B-7
viii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

List of Tables
Table 2-1: Typical BG-30 equipment installation sequence ................................... 2-2
Table 2-2: Environmental requirements ................................................................. 2-4
Table 2-3: Equipment dimensions .......................................................................... 2-5
Table 2-4: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ....................................... 2-6
Table 2-5: Traffic cables mating connector data for BG-30B ............................... 2-13
Table 2-6: Traffic cables mating connector data for BG-30E ............................... 2-14
Table 2-7: Optical fibers and mating connector data for BG-30B......................... 2-15
Table 2-8: Optical fibers and mating connector data for BG-30E......................... 2-16
Table 2-9: BG-30B/E circuit breaker data ............................................................. 2-19
Table 2-10: LC transceivers laser information STM-4 SFP .................................... 2-21
Table 2-11: LC transceivers laser information STM-1/100BaseFX SFP ................ 2-22
Table 2-12: LC transceivers laser information GbE SFP (OTGBE) ....................... 2-22
Table 3-1: Outline of typical BG-30B equipment installation sequence ................. 3-4
Table 3-2: BG-30B modules ................................................................................. 3-35
Table 3-3: BG-30E modules ................................................................................. 3-56
Table 3-4: Protection and protected cards summary............................................ 3-74
Table 3-5: Protection jumper cables usage .......................................................... 3-79
Table 3-6: TPS1_1 1:1 I/O protection slot allocation ............................................ 3-81
Table 5-1: Card and module inventory ................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks ............................................. 5-3
Table 5-3: Measured optical levels ......................................................................... 5-4
Table 5-4: 2 Mbps tests .......................................................................................... 5-6
Table 5-5: 34 Mbps tests ........................................................................................ 5-6
Table 5-6: 45 Mbps tests ........................................................................................ 5-6
Table 5-7: SDH tests .............................................................................................. 5-7
Table 5-8: Traffic stability test time intervals .......................................................... 5-9
Table 5-9: Throughput and latency test results .................................................... 5-13
Table 5-10: Frame loss-rate test results ................................................................. 5-14
Table 6-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks ................................... 6-2
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting power problems .......................................................... 6-4
Table 6-3: General troubleshooting procedures for BG-30B power-on
based on LEDs on MCP30 panel ................................................................................... 6-6
Table 6-4: General troubleshooting procedures for Tslot or XIO panels .............. 6-10
Table 6-5: General troubleshooting procedures for the MCP30........................... 6-11
Table 6-6: General troubleshooting procedures on Tslot and XIO
module panels ............................................................................................................. 6-12
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary ix

List of Tables BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Table 6-7: General troubleshooting procedures for the INF_30B/INF_30BH

and INF_30BH ............................................................................................................. 6-13
Table 6-8: General troubleshooting procedures for the FCU_30B/FCU_30BH ... 6-13
Table 6-9: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins .. 6-14
Table 6-10: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMFE_4_L1, DMFE_4_L2,
and DMEOP_4 ............................................................................................................. 6-16
Table 6-11: General troubleshooting procedures for extended cards (PE1_63,
P345_3, SM_10E, ESW_2G_8F_E, S1_4, and S4_1) ................................................ 6-17
Table 6-12: Special troubleshooting procedures for P345_3 card ......................... 6-18
Table 6-13: Special troubleshooting procedures for ESW_2G_8F_E cards .......... 6-19
Table 6-14: General troubleshooting procedures for daughterboards on
SM_10E cards ............................................................................................................. 6-20
Table 6-15: Special troubleshooting procedures for SM_EOP daughter boards ... 6-20
Table 6-16: Special troubleshooting procedures for OW box................................. 6-21
Table 6-17: Special troubleshooting procedures for TP21_2/TP63_1/
TPS1_1 cards ............................................................................................................. 6-23
Table 6-18: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMFX_4_L1 and
DMFX_4_L2 ............................................................................................................. 6-23
Table 6-19: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMGE_1_L1 ......................... 6-24
Table 6-20: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMGE_4_L1 and
DMGE_2_L2 ............................................................................................................. 6-25
Table A-1: Ethernet connector, pin assignment ...................................................... A-3
Table A-2: T3/T4 connector, PIN identification ....................................................... A-4
Table A-3: 1-11 Auxiliary connector, pin assignment.............................................. A-5
Table A-4: RS-232 connectors, pin assignment ..................................................... A-8
Table A-5: OW connector, pin assignment ............................................................. A-8
Table A-6: V.11 overhead connector, pin assignment ............................................ A-9
Table A-7: Alarms connector, pin assignment ...................................................... A-10
Table A-8: PME1_21 connector, pin assignment.................................................. A-11
Table A-9: Connector P1 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines .............................................. A-15
Table A-10: Connector P3 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines .............................................. A-17
Table A-11: Connector P1 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Tx lines ............................................ A-18
Table A-12: Connector P3 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Rx lines ............................................ A-19
Table A-13: Connector P1 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Tx lines ............................................ A-20
Table A-14: Connector P3 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Rx lines ............................................ A-21
Table A-15: Gigabit Ethernet connector, pin assignment ....................................... A-25
Table A-16: Twin 68-pin VHDCI connector (P2), pin assignment........................... A-26
Table A-17: Twin 68-pin VHDCI connector (P1), pin assignment........................... A-28
Table A-18: SM_10E SM_FXO_8 and SM_FXS_8 connector, pin assignment ..... A-31
Table A-19: SM_10E SM_EM_24W6E connector, pin assignment ........................ A-32
Table A-20: SM_10E SM_V35E connector, pin assignment .................................. A-34
x ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and List of Tables
Maintenance Manual
Table A-21: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24

transparent without controls mode ............................................................................... A-35
Table A-22: SM_V24E connector, pin assignment ................................................. A-36
synchronous with controls mode .................................................................................. A-38
Table A-24: SM_10E SM_CODIR_4E connector, pin assignment ......................... A-39
Table A-25: SM_10E SM_OMNI_E connector, pin assignment ............................. A-40
Table A-26: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving
SM_FXS_8E or SM_FXO_8E ...................................................................................... A-41
SM_EM_24W6E ........................................................................................................... A-42
SM_CODIR_4E ............................................................................................................ A-42
Table A-29: ICP_V24 synchronous V.24 25-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-43
Table A-30: ICP_V24 asynchronous V.24 9-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-44
Table A-31: ICP_V24 transparent V.24 9-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-45
Table A-32: ICP_V35 M34 female connector, pin assignment ............................... A-45
Table A-33: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment ........................... A-46
Table A-34: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment........................... A-48
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xi

List of Tables BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
xii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

About This Manual
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... xiii
Intended Audience ........................................................................................... xiii
Document Organization ................................................................................... xiii
Document Conventions ................................................................................... xiv
Related Documentation .................................................................................... xv
Obtaining Technical Documentation ................................................................ xv
Technical Assistance ....................................................................................... xvi
Overview
The BroadGate® (BG) BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual
(IOMM) describes how to install BG-30 shelves and how to install and replace
hardware components, including cards, modules, and accessories.
Intended Audience
The BG-30 IOMM is intended for installation and other qualified service
personnel responsible for installing the platform and its accessories.
Document Organization
This manual contains the following information:
 Installation
 Operation
 Maintenance
 Additional functionality
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xiii

About This Manual BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Document Conventions
When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions.
Convention Indicates Example
Bold Names of windows, dialog In the Alarms menu...
boxes, menus, buttons, and
most other GUI elements
Menu > Option Selection from a menu, or Select Update > View
leading to another Objects
command
Italics New terms, emphasized Examples in text
text, and names of manuals
and documents
Borders around text Notes, cautions, and See examples below
warnings
NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or
interesting points of information.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or
loss of information.
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.
LASER WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates

how to avoid personal injury. All personnel involved in
equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although
protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the
beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety
precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical
connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.
ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on

how to avoid discharge of static electricity and subsequent
damage to the unit.
xiv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and About This Manual
Maintenance Manual
TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information

and handy hints that can make your task easier.
IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential

information to which you must pay attention.
Related Documentation
The following publications may be of assistance to you in the installation and
commissioning processes. Some of these documents present information
supplied in this Installation Manual in greater or lesser detail.
 BroadGate Product Line General Description
 BroadGate Product Line System Specifications
 BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual
 BroadGate EMS-BGF User Manual
 BroadGate LCT-BGF User Manual
 LightSoft® Network Management System User Manual
 IEC Publication 825 - Laser Safety Requirements
Obtaining Technical
Documentation
To obtain technical documentation related to ECI Telecom products, contact:
ECI Telecom Ltd.
Documentation Department
30 Hasivim St.
Petach Tikva 49130
Israel
Fax: +972-3-9268060
mailto:techdoc.feedback@ecitele.com
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xv

About This Manual BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Technical Assistance
The configuration, installation, and operation of the BroadGate and its
operation in a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different
nature of each installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this
manual.
If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require
installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, ECI Telecom
maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel.
The services of this group are available to customers at any time.
If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation
plan from ECI Telecom's Customer Support team, contact your ECI Telecom
sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic,
please contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support center at your location. If
you are not familiar with that location, please contact our central customer
support center action line at:
Telephone +972-3-9266000
Telefax +972-3-9266370
Email on.support@ecitele.com
ECI Telecom's BroadGate® and XDM® product lines are

certified to comply with MEF9 and MEF14 standards.
xvi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

1
Introduction
In this chapter:
BG-30 Platform Overview............................................................................... 1-1
BG-30 Platform Overview

ECI Telecom’s BG-30 delivers a cost-effective and affordable mix of Ethernet,
SDH, PDH, and PCM services that result in new revenue-generating
opportunities. It offers a wide variety of features and benefits, including:
 High traffic survivability through main hardware duplication.
 Ultra-high scalability based on coupling the BG-30E to the BG-30B to
make a build-as-you-grow® solution.
 Gradual capacity expansion based on service provisioning needs from
ADM1 up to ADM16.
 Ability to add interfaces easily while the network element (NE) is working
by plugging in appropriate cards ranging from E1 cards for multiple ports
to STM-4 cards.
 Carrier class Ethernet-over-WAN/MAN solution with SDH reliability,
security, and management of data services.
 Sublambda grooming for high utilization of existing fiber and top
efficiency in transmission of different types of services.
 PCM service interfaces and 1/0 digital cross-connect functions to facilitate
the construction and maintenance of various private networks.
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-1

Introduction BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
 Multi-ADM and cross-connect functionality, ideal for deployment in

flexible network topologies like ring, mesh, and star.
 Compactness and resiliency, making it perfectly suited for both indoor and
outdoor enclosures. Due to its extended operating temperature range, it is
also most suitable for harsh environmental conditions.
Figure 1-1: Typical BG-30 shelf
1-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

2
Before You Start
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Site Preparation ............................................................................................... 2-4
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-6
Installation of BG-30 in Racks ........................................................................ 2-7
Preparing Cables and Fibers .......................................................................... 2-10
Work and Equipment Safety.......................................................................... 2-17
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge ................................................... 2-23
Overview
This chapter contains important information that will help you carry out a safe
and trouble-free installation.

Before You Start BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Outline of the Installation Procedure

The main steps involved in the installation of BG-30 equipment are described
in the following table. Consult your site installation plans for specific details.
Table 2-1: Typical BG-30 equipment installation sequence
No. Task Reference

1 Prepare the installation site and check the Before You Start (on page
physical location, environmental compliance, 2-1)
and availability of power sources.
2 Prepare power, alarm, management, and Before You Start (on page
transmission cables at the installation site. 2-1) and Equipment
Installation (on page 3-1)
3 Route the required power, alarm, management, Equipment Installation (on
and transmission cables to the intended BG-30 page 3-1)
equipment location.
4 If required, install the equipment racks. Equipment Installation (on
page 3-1)
5  Mark the location of each BG-30 shelf, Equipment Installation (on
relevant accessories (Fiber Storage Tray page 3-1)
[FST], Optical Distribution Frame [ODF],
Digital Distribution Frame [DDF], and
MCP30 Interconnection Panel
[ICP_MCP30]) on each rack, in accordance
with the site installation plan.
Notes:
 For only BG-30B installation, it is
recommended that you leave at least 4 U of
space above the BG-30B shelf to enable
future installation of the BG-30E shelf.
 The BG-30B can only support balanced E1
interfaces directly. For unbalanced E1s, the
xDDF-21 patch panel must be configured,
which provides conversion between
balanced and unbalanced E1s for 21 x E1s.
 When auxiliary interfaces like RS-232,
orderwire, or V.11 are used in your
application, the ICP_MCP30 should be
installed in order to distribute the
concentrated Auxiliary connector into
dedicated connectors for each function.
6 When applicable, install the EMS-BGF EMS-BGF Installation
management station. Guide
7 Install the Rack Alarm Panel (RAP) and other Equipment Installation (on
equipment needed in each rack. page 3-1)
8 Install the BG-30 shelves in the appropriate rack. Equipment Installation (on
page 3-1)

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Before You Start
Maintenance Manual
No. Task Reference

9 For each BG-30 shelf where optical modules are Equipment Installation (on
used, install an FST under the BG-30 shelf and page 3-1)
route the optical fibers to the FST.
Note: Even if you are not currently installing an
FST, it is recommended that you leave enough
space beneath the BG-30 shelf to enable future
installation.
10 Install the prescribed modules in the BG-30B
shelf, including two INF_30B or INF_30BH
modules, FCU_30B or FCU_30BH, MCP30,
two XIO30 modules (XIO30_1, XIO30Q_1&4,
XIO30_4, or XIO30_16), and optional Tslot
modules.
Install the prescribed modules in the BG-30E
shelf, including two INF_30E modules,
FCU_30E, or other extension cards, such as the
PE1_63, P345_3E, SM_10E, and
ESW_2G_8F_E.
11 Install the SFP modules for XIO30 modules. Equipment Installation (on
page 3-1)
12 Depending on the modules or cards in your Equipment Installation (on
BG-30 shelf: page 3-1)
 Route the PDH electrical cables from the
DDF to the E1 interfaces on the front panel
of PME1_21 modules, the E3/DS-3
interfaces on the front panel of PM345_3
modules, and STM-1e interfaces on the
STM-1 electrical SFPs.
 Route the data cables to the Fast Ethernet
interfaces on the front panel of DMFE_4_L1
modules.
 If the ICP_MCP30 is installed, route the
special cables to connect the ICP_MCP30
and the MCP30, and route cables for
interfaces on the ICP_MCP30 panel. If the
ICP_MCP30 is not installed and external
alarms interfaces are used, route the special
Alarms cable from the MCP30 Auxiliary
connector to the RAP.
Note: The DDF can be installed on the same
rack as the BG-30 shelf, or on a different rack.
13 Connect management cables between the Equipment Installation (on
equipment installed in the rack and the page 3-1)
management station.
14 Connect power cables from the RAP panel to Equipment Installation (on
each BG-30 shelf installed in the rack. page 3-1)

Maintenance Manual
Site Preparation
Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking into consideration
the following issues:
 System environmental requirements
 Physical location of the BG-30 shelves
 Location of power sources
 Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm
monitoring, and so on)
 Work and equipment safety requirements
Environmental Requirements
The environmental conditions listed in the following table are applicable to
BG-30 equipment and must be ensured at the installation site.
Table 2-2: Environmental requirements
Parameter Compliance requirements

Electromagnetic interference EN 55022/94, EN 50082-1/92
Temperature ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1

Maintenance Manual
Physical Location
WARNING: BG-30 shelves are intended for installation in

restricted-access areas only.
Before you start:

Choose the physical location of the BG-30 shelves, taking the following
aspects into consideration:
1. Equipment dimensions (see the following table).
2. Required floor loading capability: 100 kg for a typical eight-shelf
installation.
3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring,
management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to
cables and fibers, it is recommended, whenever possible, to use overhead
cable ladders to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.
4. When a network management station, for example, the EMS-BGF, is
installed on the site, consider the method of connection to the local network
management station and the maximum allowed distance.
Table 2-3: Equipment dimensions
Equipment type Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Max. weight (kg)
BG-30B 44.4 440 243 5
BG-30E 88.9 443.4 243 4.5
RAP-BG 88 440 150 4
RAP-4B 88 447 155 2.4
FST 44.5 440 240 5
ODF 44.5 440 240 8
xDDF-21 44.5 440 150 1.5
ICP_MCP30 44 440 140 1.5

Maintenance Manual
Power Sources
BG-30 shelves can be powered by DC sources complying with the applicable
sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and the SELV or TNV requirements of EN 60950.
The nominal supply voltage is -48 VDC (positive-lead grounded). However,
the allowed supply voltage range is -40 VDC to -75 VDC. For redundancy, two
separate DC power sources must be available. In the DC power supply, the
maximum power consumption of the BG-30B is 55 W.
For AC power supply, configure an external AC/DC converter.
NOTE: If the planned power consumption of the equipment

installed in the shelf is 80% or more of the maximum listed
value, it is recommended to consult ECI Telecom Customer
Support.
Tools and Test Equipment

No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technician’s toolbox are required
for the installation of BG-30 shelves.
Since traffic cables can be prepared on site, suitable tool kits must be available.
They include tools for the assembly of coaxial cables as listed in the following
table, and tools for the preparation of optical patch cords.
Table 2-4: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools
No. Name Description

1 Stripper DIN 1.0/2.3
2 Center contact crimp tool (blue) DIN 1.0/2.3
3 Crimp tool, outer DIN 1.0/2.3
4 Cable stripper ---
5 Nipper (cutter for center contact) ---
6 Die for NCX1 ---
Cleaning Optical Connectors

When handling optical fibers, clean the optical connectors by using the
standard cleaning kits recommended by the manufacturers.

Maintenance Manual
Installation of BG-30 in Racks

Installation Plan
This section provides guidelines for planning the installation of BG-30 shelves
and ancillary equipment in racks.
We recommend installation in ECI Telecom ETSI racks, which provide the
following advantages:
 Removable rear and side panels, enabling tidy leading and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
 PCM/E1/E3/DS-3/STM-1e cables
 Control cables
 Power cables
 Data cables
 Voice frequency cables
 Timing cables
 Two ducts on the rack’s front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers
 Open frame top and bottom, facilitating easy leading of cables from
suspension floors and/or ceiling ladders
 Front door mountable for left or right opening
BG-30 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating
floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.

Maintenance Manual
Typical BG-30 Installation

A typical installation of a BG-30 shelf in an ECI Telecom ETSI rack, refer to
the figure Typical installation of four BG-30 shelves in an ETSI 2200 rack (on
page 2-9). In this figure, four BG-30B shelves are shown.
In addition to the BG-30B shelf, the equipment installed in the rack can
include:
 One RAP installed at the top of the rack. The RAP is used to connect
external power and alarm monitoring lines (RAP-4B only) to the BG-30B
shelves installed in the rack. The RAP fully supports up to four shelves
with dual power feeding. In addition to the space needed for RAP
installation, you must leave at least 50 mm of free space under the RAP for
cable routing.
NOTE: The RAP-BG does not support alarm monitoring

lines.
 Fiber Storage Tray. A separate FST can be installed for each BG-30 with
optical modules. Each FST contains two storage reels, enabling the fiber to
be stored on the right or left side of the tray. Leave at least 50 mm of free
space between the BG-30 shelf and its FST, and another 50 mm free
between the FST and the next BG-30 shelf.
 xDDF-21. When unbalanced E1 interfaces are needed, the xDDF-21 must
be installed with the BG-30. Each xDDF-21 can support 21 channels of E1.
The xDDF-21 can be installed anywhere on the same rack as the BG-30
shelf or on another rack.
 ICP_MCP30. When an RS-232 or V.11 interface from the MCP30 is used,
the ICP_MPC30 must be installed to distribute the concentrated Auxiliary
connector into dedicated connectors for each function. The ICP_MCP30
can be installed anywhere on the same rack as the BG-30 shelf.

Maintenance Manual
Integrating BG-30 Shelves and Other

Equipment in One Rack
BG-30 shelves and associated accessories may not occupy the entire rack.
Additional equipment may be installed in the remaining rack space, provided
that any heat generated by additional equipment can be dissipated efficiently,
and that thermal isolation is provided between the various equipment units.
In the event of additional equipment being installed on the rack, contact ECI
Telecom’s Customer Support team for assistance.
Figure 2-1: Typical installation of four BG-30 shelves in an ETSI 2200 rack

Maintenance Manual
Preparing Cables and Fibers

NOTE: This section provides information needed for
preparing cables and optical fibers. The necessary cables can
be ordered from ECI Telecom. For details, contact ECI
Telecom’s Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom sales
representative.
Before you start:

The following main types of cables are required for installing the BG-30:
 Grounding cables (on page 2-11)
 DC power cables (RAP Input Power Cables (on page 2-11) and Shelf
Power Cables (on page 2-12))
 Alarm cables (on page 2-12)
 Management cables (on page 2-12)
 Timing (clock) cables (on page 2-13)
 Optical fibers (on page 2-15)
 Electric traffic cables (on page 2-13)
Some of these cables are supplied as part of the BG-30 equipment, while others
must be prepared on site or ordered separately from ECI Telecom.
In the following sections, you will find information about the cables, and how
to prepare them on site, where relevant. For further details about the equipment
connector types and cable wiring, see Connection Data (on page A-1).
WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and

grounding cables, use only UL-listed components of the
specified types. Components must also comply with any
applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.
Only qualified trained personnel may be involved in the
preparation of the various cable types. Personnel must use
only approved procedures, in accordance with the applicable
workmanship practice.

Maintenance Manual
Grounding Cables
Shelf grounding is achieved by connecting the shelf to the rack using rack
mounting brackets. Grounding is provided by contact when the unit is fastened
to the rack.
A reliable low-impedance connection must be provided using copper
conductors between the rack frame and the site grounding bus.
Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding
bus with a 2 AWG (35 mm2) or thicker copper lead with yellow/green
insulation, in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations.
Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare
portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole
compression lug. If the lug is not plated, polish it until it has a bright finish and
coat it with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack. Do not
mix different types of metal conductors.
DC Power Cables
DC power cables must be prepared on site. Two types of DC power cables are
needed:
 RAP input power cables
 Shelf power cables
ECI Telecom recommends the use of shielded power cables for DC power
connections, with the shields connected to the frame ground at the rack end
only.
RAP Input Power Cables

The RAP input power cables are prepared on site. They connect input power
from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input terminals of the
RAP.
Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The
cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use
a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative
conductor. The RAP cable ends must be terminated in M6 cable lugs matching
the conductor gauge.
The recommended cable gauge is 25 mm² or thicker. This gauge ensures that
the voltage drop across the rack power cable does not exceed 2 V, even for
cable runs of maximum 30 meters connected to a RAP and providing power to
multiple BG-30 shelves.

Maintenance Manual
When the RAP is used to provide power to a single BG-30 shelf, lower-lead
gauges may be used, as follows:
 For runs not exceeding 20 meters, it is sufficient to use 10 mm2 copper
leads.
 For runs not exceeding 30 meters, it is sufficient to use 16 mm2 copper
leads.
Shelf Power Cables

One 12 AWG cable, supplied by ECI Telecom, is used to connect the input
power from the rack RAP unit to the POWER IN connector on each INF_30B
or INF_30BH module of each BG-30B shelf installed in the rack.
Alarm Cables
Alarm cables used within BG-30 equipment are included in the shipment
according to site specifications.
The alarm indications are carried by the shelf alarm indication cable. One shelf
alarm indication cable is required for each BG-30 shelf installed in the rack.
There are two types of alarm cable. If the ICP_MCP30 is not installed, an
alarm cable connects between the Auxiliary connector on the MCP30 and one
of the Alarms connectors on the RAP (RAP-4B only). If the ICP_MCP30 is
installed, another alarm cable connects between the Alarms connector on the
ICP_MCP30 and one of the Alarms connectors on the RAP (RAP-4B only).
Cable length is 2 m.
NOTE: There are no Alarms connectors on the RAP-BG.
Management Cables
Out-of-band management traffic is connected to a BG-30 shelf via the RJ-45
(MNG) connector located on the front panel of the MCP30.
The MNG Ethernet connector is wired as a 10BaseT station port for direct
connection through an RJ-45-to-RJ-45 straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT
Ethernet hub.
Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources.
Cables of Category 5 or better must be used. In all cases, the length of the
cables must not exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub
port in use (up to a few dozen meters).

Maintenance Manual
Timing (Clock) Cables

The BG-30 shelf uses an RJ-45 connector on the MCP30 front panel that
integrates the two timing reference interfaces (2 x T3 and 2 x T4). If it has
balanced (120 Ω) G.703 interfaces, a multi twisted-pair cable with an RJ-45
connector (supplied by ECI Telecom) is used to connect timing signals from
the BG-30 to the site timing reference distribution subsystems.
If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 Ω) G.703
interfaces, configure an adapter with coaxial cables that provides
balanced-to-unbalanced conversion (supplied by ECI Telecom).
Electric Traffic Cables

Some electric traffic cables can be prepared on site. The following table lists
the type of cables and mating connectors needed for each BG-30 traffic
interface type.
Table 2-5: Traffic cables mating connector data for BG-30B

Module or Interface type Cable type Mating connector Connector at Qty./module
card other end
PME1_21 E1 balanced Multipair cable 100-pin SCSI Open 1
(2.048 Mbps) (2 x 21 120 Ω male
twisted pairs)
PME1_21 1 E1 balanced Twin multipair 100-pin SCSI 2 x 50-pin 1
(2.048 Mbps) cable (2 x 21 male SCSI male
120 Ω twisted
pairs)
PME1_63 E1 balanced 3 x twin 2 x 136-pin Open 1
(2.048 Mbps multipair cable VHDCI (connects to
(2 x 21 120 W DDF)
twisted pairs)
xDDF-21 E1 unbalanced Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 42
(2.048 Mbps) (prepared in
the field)
PM345_3 E3/DS-3 (34/45 Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 6
Mbps) (prepared in
the field)
SMD1B 2 STM-1 electrical Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 (on Open 2/4
electrical SFP) (prepared in
the field)
SMQ1 3 STM-1e Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 8
(prepared in
the field)
1
Cable is used to connect the PME1_21 E1 interface connector to the xDDF-21.
2
Electrical or optical SFPs can be used when working in STM-1; the cable type is determined according to the SFP
used.
3
Cables are required when electrical SFPs are used in the module.

Maintenance Manual

card other end
SMQ1&4 4 STM-1e Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 8
(prepared in
the field)
XIO30_1/4 5 STM-1 electrical Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 2
(prepared in
the field)
XIO30Q_ STM-1e Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 8
1&4 (prepared in
the field)
DMEOP_4 100BaseT Cat.5e RJ-45 RJ-45 4
DMGE_1_L1 6 1000BaseT Cat.5e RJ-45 RJ-45 1
7
DMGE_4_L1 10/100/1000Base Cat.5e RJ-45 RJ-45 4
T
DMGE_2_L2 8 10/100/1000Base Cat.5e RJ-45 RJ-45 2
T
DMGE_4_L2 9 10/100/1000Base Cat.5e RJ-45 RJ-45 4
T
Table 2-6: Traffic cables mating connector data for BG-30E

card other end
PE1_63 E1 balanced Multipair cable 2 x 50-pin SCSI Open 3
(2.048 Mbps) (2 x 21 120 Ω male
twisted pairs)
PM345_3E E3/DS-3 (34/45 Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 6
Mbps) (prepared in
the field)
MPS_2G_8F 10/100/1000Ba Cat.5e RJ-45 RJ-45 10
seT
TP21_2 E1 balanced Twin multipair Twin 2 x 68-pin Open 2
(2.048 Mbps) cable (2 x 21 VHDCI male (prepared in
120 Ω twisted the field)
pairs)
TP21_2 10 E1 balanced Twin multipair Twin 2 x 68-pin 100-pin SCSI 3
(2.048 Mbps) cable (2 x 21 VHDCI male male
120 Ω twisted
pairs)
TP63_1 E1 balanced Twin multipair Twin 2 x 68-pin Open 3
(2.048 Mbps) cable (2 x 21 VHDCI male (prepared in
120 Ω twisted the field)
pairs)
4
5
Electrical or optical SFPs can be used when working in STM-1; the cable type is determined according to the SFP
used.
6
Cable is required when the DMGE_1_L1 is working in electrical mode (RJ-45).
7
8
9
10
Cable is used to connect protection PME1_21 E1 interfaces connector to the TP21_2.

Maintenance Manual

card other end
TP63_1 11 E1 balanced Twin multipair Twin 2 x 68-pin Twin 2 x 2
(2.048 Mbps) cable (2 x 21 VHDCI male 68-pin
120 Ω twisted VHDCI male
pairs)
TPS1_1 STM-1e/ Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 8
E3/DS3 (prepared in
the field)
TPS1_1 12 STM-1e/ Coaxial cable DB 8W8P DIN 1.0/2.3 2
E3/DS3
xDDF-21 E1 unbalanced Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open 42
(2.048 Mbps) (prepared in
the field)
Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be prepared on site. The following table lists the type of
cables and mating connectors needed to prepare cables for each BG-30 module.
For each optical interface, ECI Telecom supplies patch cords with mating
optical connectors already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical
termination on the ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed
on site.
The optical fibers for connecting to equipment installed in a given rack must
enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable guides running along the
rack side rails, and end at the FST. The FST must contain enough fiber length
for extracting modules from the BG-30 and for replacing fiber in case of
damage (splicing repairs).
When routing fibers, make sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35
mm).
Table 2-7: Optical fibers and mating connector data for BG-30B
I/O module Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty./module
connector
SMD1B STM-1 optical One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 4 fibers
interface
SMQ1 STM-1 optical One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 8 fibers
interface
SMQ1&4 STM-1&4 One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 8 fibers
optical interface
SMS4 STM-4 optical One pair of fiber patch cords LC male 2 fibers
SMD4 STM-4 optical One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 4 fibers
interface
SMS16 STM-16 optical One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 2 fibers
interface
11
Cable is used to connect protection PE1_63 or PME1_21 E1 interfaces connector to the TP63_1
12
Cable is used to connect protection card interfaces connector to the TPS1_1

Maintenance Manual

connector
XIO30_1 STM-1 optical One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 2 fibers
interface OR
OR 1 fibers (if a
One fiber patch cord per bidirectional SFP
interface if a bidirectional SFP module is used)
module is used
XIO30Q_1&4 STM-1&4 One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 8 fibers
optical interface
interface
interface
DMFX_4_L1 100BaseFX One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 8 fibers
interface
DMGE_1_L1 13 1000BaseFX One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 2 fibers
interface
interface
DMFX_4_L2 100BaseFX One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 8 fibers
interface
interface
Table 2-8: Optical fibers and mating connector data for BG-30E
connector
S1_4 STM-1 optical One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 8
interface
S4_1 STM-4 optical One pair of fiber patch cords LC male 2
ESW_2G_8F_E GbE optical One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 4
interface
MPS_2G_8F GbE optical One pair of fiber patch cords per LC male 4
interface
13
Fibers are required when DMGE_1_L1 is working in SFP mode. Multimode fiber for 1000BaseSX, and single
mode fiber for 1000BaseLX/ZX.
14
Fibers are required when DMGE_4_L1/DMGE_2_L2 interfaces are working in 1000BaseFX mode. The fiber type
in this mode must be multimode.
15
Fibers are required when DMGE_4_L1/DMGE_2_L2 interfaces are working in 1000BaseFX mode. The fiber type
in this mode must be multimode.

Maintenance Manual
Work and Equipment Safety

NOTE: BG-30 equipment is intended for installation in
restricted-access areas only.
BG-30 shelves contain power sources of varying voltages. Take note of the
following guidelines for installing the shelves:
Before you start:

 Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections.
 Make sure that sufficient lighting is available.
 Do not work on any equipment when it is connected to a voltage source
(DC or AC).
 Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 70°C.
 Use only insulated tools.
 Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations.
 Do not install or maintain equipment connected to external lines (for
example, E1 tributaries) during thunderstorms.
 Avoid contact with high-voltage sources when installing shelves, cards, and
modules.
 Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels on the
equipment and strictly observe the procedures needed to avoid the
indicated hazards.

Maintenance Manual
Grounding Requirements
All the equipment, including BG-30 shelves, ancillary units, and equipment
from other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good equipment
grounding is necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise,
and allow the discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.
Rack Grounding Requirements

Connect the rack to the site grounding bar with a ground cable according to
ETSI recommendations (top/bottom connection).
The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt welded to the
rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by the ground symbol
label.
The rack grounding bolt must be connected to the site grounding bar by a 35
mm2 (2 AWG) grounding cable or thicker, as short as possible, complying with
UL/ETSI recommendations. The bolt must be free of paint. The cable must be
made of copper strands and terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
NOTE: If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also

be reduced to the gauge of the RAP power leads.
The rack mounting rails must be free of paint and provide electrical continuity
to the main grounding bolt. The resistance between any rail and the rack main
grounding bolt must be less than 0.1 Ω.
Pay particular attention to the area in which the RAP is attached. Remove paint
from the rack in this area to ensure efficient electrical contact.
CAUTION: Connect the RAP grounding bolt to the rack

grounding bolt with a grounding cable complying with
UL/ETSI recommendations. The cable must include bolt
terminals on both ends and be securely fastened with a nut
and a star washer.

Maintenance Manual
Power Supply Requirements

The BG-30B and BG-30E shelves require two power sources with a nominal
voltage of -48 VDC. Each power source is protected by a UL-listed circuit
breaker installed in the RAP. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the equipment, and therefore, their current
rating is in accordance with the order.
The site operator must provide a readily accessible UL-listed disconnect device
incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. This device limits the
maximum delivered current to a safe value.
Table 2-9: BG-30B/E circuit breaker data
Shelf ID Shelf-to-RAP Circuit breaker Quantity per shelf

connection type amps
BG-30B One cable per 8A  One for nonredundant powering
INF_30B or  Two for redundant powering
INF_30BH input
BG-30E One cable per 5A  One for nonredundant powering
INF_30E input  Two for redundant powering
Expanded set One Y cable per set 12A  One for nonredundant powering
(BG-30B+BG-30E  Two for redundant powering

Maintenance Manual
Laser Safety Requirements
Laser Classification
The equipment and components with laser devices described in this manual
comply with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety
standards, including IEC-60825-1 - Safety of Laser Products (AS/NZS 2211.2)
and IEC-825 – Safety of Optical Fiber Communication Systems.
With specific regard to the laser, BG-30 equipment complies with laser product
performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products.
The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous light, and the beam is
totally enclosed during all operating modes and maintenance.
Warning Labels for Laser Products

The following labels are affixed to the shelf front panel. The labels indicate that
the product is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product, Hazard Class 1M.
Figure 2-2: Laser warning label
Laser Safety Statutory Warning

All personnel involved in equipment installation and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective devices
generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe
the applicable safety precautions and in particular must avoid staring into
optical connectors, either directly or through optical instruments.

Maintenance Manual
Laser Device Operating Precautions

In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to
observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser
device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in fire, bodily injury, and
damage to the equipment.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous

radiation, note the following:
 When performing maintenance and other activities on
equipment using lasers, it is recommended that you use
protection goggles for the wavelength range of 1300 nm to
1600 nm.
 Only authorized personnel must carry out hot insertion or
swapping of an optical module or optical interface
module.
 To prevent irremediable damage to your eyes, avoid
looking into the fiber when hot-removing and/or inserting
a fiber termination.
 Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber
terminations that are not currently in use.
 Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform
procedures associated with the laser device other than
those specified herein.
It is strictly forbidden to interfere with any protective devices
and interlocks that are used to prevent direct exposure to the
laser beam.
Laser Information
Information regarding the various optical modules available for the BG-30
platform is provided in the following tables.
Table 2-10: LC transceivers laser information STM-4 SFP
Module Parameter Data

STM-4 SFP Laser designation S3 L3 L5
Operating wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1550
Source type Single mode Single Single
mode mode
Minimum mean launched -15 -3 -3
power (dBm)
Maximum mean launched -8 +2 +2
power (dBm)

Maintenance Manual
Table 2-11: LC transceivers laser information STM-1/100BaseFX SFP

STM-1 Laser designation S3 L3 L5 BD 3 16 BD 5 17
SFP
Operating 1310 1310 1550 1310 1550
wavelength (nm)
Source type Single Single Single Single Single
mode mode mode mode mode
Minimum mean -15 -5 -5 -14 -14
launched power (dBm)
Maximum mean -8 0 0 -8 -8
Table 2-12: LC transceivers laser information GbE SFP (OTGBE)

GbE SFP Laser designation SX LX L5
Operating 850 1310 1550
wavelength (nm)
Source type Multi Single mode Single mode
mode
Minimum mean -9.5 -11 0
Maximum mean -3 -3 5
16
Single-fiber bidirectional transceivers with a transmit wavelength of 1310 nm.
17
Single-fiber bidirectional transceivers with a transmit wavelength of 1550 nm.

Maintenance Manual
Protection Against Electrostatic

Discharge
This section provides guidelines regarding the protection of BG-30 equipment
and its components against electrostatic damage (ESD) during handling,
packing/unpacking, transport, installation, commissioning, inspections,
servicing, and maintenance.
Electronic equipment, assemblies, and components that are ESDS (Electrostatic
discharge sensitive) or include sensitive items are identified by the basic ESD
warning symbol shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-3: Basic ESD warning symbol
The information provided in this section is in line with CENELEC Electronic

Components Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015, which deals with
protection of devices sensitive to ESD.
Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be
damaged by electrostatic discharges. An ESD between two objects occurs
when an object carrying static electrical charges touches or is brought near
another object.
Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of
insulating materials or separation of two such surfaces, and may also be
induced by electrical fields. Routine activities such as walking across an
insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and
so on, can easily build up charges to levels that may cause damage, especially
when humidity is low.
In many cases, the build-up of charge can be avoided by using special
materials, for example, garments and packaging can be made of antistatic
materials or materials that have high resistance, but yet are not insulators.

Maintenance Manual
The best way to avoid damage by ESD is a combination of means and

procedures that achieves the following goals:
 Avoids build-up of electrostatic charges
 Creates a protected work environment that helps prevent ESD
 Provides means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic
charges when entering the protected work environment
NOTE: An area in which ESDS can be handled with

minimum risk of damage as a result of ESD or fields, and in
which the operator is not exposed to additional risks, is called
an ESD Protected Area (EPA).
Personnel Training
During production and assembly, equipment is handled in workspaces
especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in
many cases, the environment in which the same equipment is installed or
maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled
boundary. Therefore, all the work involving handling of unprotected ESD must
be considered as field work.
Field work in this context includes such activities as service and maintenance,
installation, site inspections, and commissioning of components and assemblies
classified as ESDS, together with associated packing and unpacking activities.
All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform field work in the
same way as work performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material
quality, personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packing.

Maintenance Manual
Use of a Temporary EPA

Where necessary, a temporary EPA must be used. The EPA toolkit includes:
 Wrist strap with 1 M Ω series resistor
 Bonding strap with 1 M Ω series resistor
 ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or
flooring capable of providing protection against ESD.
CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a way

that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used, and
prevents the occurrence of any sudden changes in potential
within the EPA that could cause unacceptable voltages or
discharges to be applied to ESDS.
A means of equipotentially bonding the operator and any work surface and
flooring to ground must be used. For this purpose, the work surface and wrist
straps must be bonded either to a designated ground bonding point or to the
equipment being serviced.
Whenever available, the mains’ ground serves as the ESD grounding facility.
WARNING: While the operator is within the temporary EPA,

the minimum value of resistance used for bonding to ground
must limit the current to ground, produced by voltages
accessible to the operator, to limits specified as safe by the
applicable regulations (see, for example, CECC 00 015). The
same approach is applicable to the surface resistance and
resistance to ground of materials used for temporary work
surfaces and flooring.
To enable ESD bonding to ground of equipment racks and any other

nonmoveable equipment containing ESD, an ESD ground bonding facility must
be located near such equipment, or the equipment must be fitted with a
designated ground bonding point presenting a resistance to ground not greater
than 1 MΩ.

Maintenance Manual
Work Arrangements Within a Temporary

EPA
To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following
arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field
work within a temporary EPA area:
 All operators working within a temporary EPA area must wear, as a
minimum, an ESD antistatic protecting garment made of cotton.
 If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to
walk and move within that area, the floor of the area must be capable of
providing protection against ESD.
 The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling ESDS.
 If it becomes necessary to remove an ESDS from equipment and transfer it
to a temporary work surface away from the equipment, the ESDS must be
given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding to ground of the
operator is maintained.
 An ESDS must be placed directly into protective packaging when it is
removed from equipment. A replacement ESDS must be kept in its
protective packaging until required for immediate installation in the
equipment.
 The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools
necessary to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at the
place of the field work at service time.
 All tools for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be constructed
so that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic charge.

3
Equipment Installation
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Preparations ................................................................................. 3-2
Installation Sequence ....................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................. 3-5
Installation Options.......................................................................................... 3-6
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ................................................................. 3-8
Installing the BG-30B Shelf in the Rack ....................................................... 3-32
Installing the BG-30E Shelf in the Rack ....................................................... 3-50
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-30 Shelf ........................................ 3-65
Overview
This chapter provides general instructions for the installation of the BG-30 and
auxiliary equipment.
The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those
for installation, and when relevant, notes regarding live replacement or upgrade
are inserted in these procedures.
Use the information in this chapter in conjunction with specific site installation
plans in the particular customer network. If you are interested in obtaining
design or installation assistance from ECI Telecom’s Customer Support team
or wish to prepare a network installation plan, contact your ECI Telecom sales
representative.
The BG-30 shelves, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in
the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.

Equipment Installation BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Preliminary Preparations
The installation procedures provided in this chapter assume that:
 The sites at which the installation procedures are to be carried out comply
with the requirements listed in Site Preparation (on page 2-4).
 The preliminary preparations specified in Before You Start have been
completed.
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by
referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit.
To avoid errors, it is recommended that you mark the prescribed positions on
the rack rails using a soft pencil.
Installation Sequence
Each component of the BG-30 system is supplied separately and must be
installed in the correct sequence according to the site plan.
A typical installation might include the equipment illustrated in the following
figure. The different components in the illustration are described according to
the steps in the following table.
NOTE: If you are not installing an FST for a particular BG-30

shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the
rack in case optical modules are added in the future. If you
are not installing a BG-30E for a particular BG-30B shelf, it
is highly recommended that you leave enough empty space
(about 5 U) above the BG-30B shelf in case one is added in
the future.
CAUTION:
 If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer or
a buffer plate must be installed between such equipment
and the BG-30 shelf to minimize the transfer of heat from
shelf to shelf. This heat buffer must be purchased from
ECI Telecom.
 During the installation of equipment in the rack, make
sure all the optical connectors are closed by protective
caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is
connected to the corresponding connector.

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Equipment Installation
Maintenance Manual
For illustrations of installation options, see Installation Options (on page 3-6).
Figure 3-1: Typical installation of a single BG-30 shelf in a 2200 ETSI rack
NOTE: The FST must be installed below the BG-30B. If the

BG-30E is not installed, space above the BG-30B must be
reserved for it.
Depending on the specific equipment being installed as per the site installation
plan, the installation of a BG-30 system comprises the following stages, listed
in the required order of execution.

Maintenance Manual
Table 3-1: Outline of typical BG-30B equipment installation sequence
Step Procedure
1 Install a rack (if required).
2 Unpack and perform a visual inspection.
3 Install ancillary equipment in the rack, including:
 RAP unit
 FST (optional)
 Optional ODF units
 Optional DDF units
 Optional ICP_MCP30 unit
4 Install the BG-30B shelf in the rack.

5 Install the BG-30B modules in the BG-30B shelf. BG-30B modules include:
2 x INF_30B or INF_30BH, 1 x FCU_30B or FCU_30BH, 1 x MCP30, 2 x
XIO30 cards (XIO30_1, XIO30Q_1&4, XIO30_4, or XIO30_16) and
several Tslot modules (such as PME1_21 and DMFE_4_L1).
6 Install the SFP modules in the BG-30B shelf (for XIO30 modules).
7 Route and connect all cables and fibers, including:
 Power and alarm cables
 Optical fibers to optical modules transceivers
 Traffic cables to electrical cards
 Data cables
 Timing cables
 Management cable

Maintenance Manual
Unpacking and Performing

Visual Inspection
Before you start:
Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes.
Immediately report evidence of damage to the carrier, the project manager, and
your local ECI Telecom representative.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices

Proper handling and grounding precautions required
BG-30 equipment contains components sensitive to
electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage,
strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection Against
ESD (on page 2-23). Keep parts and cards in their antistatic
packaging material until you are ready to install them.
The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.
You must unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface.
To unpack the equipment:

1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a
short knife so as not to damage the internal items, and open the top flaps.
2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each item for damage.
Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, shelf, and auxiliary
equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads, and cables.
NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors

until optical cables are connected to them.
3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be
present.
4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not
remove the modules/cards from their individual protective packages until
they can be inserted in the shelf.
5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached
to each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing,
notify the project manager and your local ECI Telecom representative
immediately.

Maintenance Manual
Installation Options
It is recommended that BG-30 shelves be installed in ECI Telecom
recommended racks. These racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or
suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.
The following racks are supported:
 Standard 19” rack
 Standard ETSI
 Open frame
NOTE: BG-30 shelves can also be installed in standard street

cabinets. Consult ECI Telecom for more details.
By default, the BG-30 is shipped with 19” mounting brackets.
If you are installing in an ETSI rack, ETSI brackets must be
ordered separately and replaced in the field.

Maintenance Manual
You can install up to eight BG-30B shelves in a rack. Typical installation of

four BG-30B shelves in an ETSI 2200 rack is shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-2: Typical installation of four BG-30B shelves
If necessary, contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support team or your ECI
Telecom sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation
requirements.
NOTE: The BG-30 can be installed in ETSI and US 23” racks

with filters or in 19” racks without filters, which have been
approved by ECI Telecom.

Maintenance Manual
Installing Ancillary Units in

Racks
ECI Telecom offers various accessories for efficient and optimal installation in
racks. Contact ECI Telecom’s Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom
sales representative if you need custom modifications to standard items, or for
additional items.
This section includes instructions for the installation of ancillary units. The
specific units you need to install depend on your site installation plan and may
include one or more of the following:
 RAP unit: For connecting up to four or eight BG-30 shelves (BG-30 with
BG-30E is counted as two shelves) on the same rack, usually located at the
top of the rack. For more information, see Installing the RAP-BG (on page
3-9) and Installing the RAP-4B (on page 3-16).
 FST: Located under the BG-30B shelf, recommended for installations with
a large number of optical modules. For more information, see Installing the
Fiber Storage Tray (on page 3-23).
 ODF units: For more information, see Installing the ODF (on page 3-25).
 xDDF-21: This unit must be installed for unbalanced E1 interfaces. For
more information, see Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel (on page 3-28).
 ICP_MPC30: This unit is used to distribute the concentrated Auxiliary
connector on the MCP30B panel into dedicated connectors for each
function. For more information, see Installing the ICP_MCP30 (on page 3-
29).
 AC_CONV_UNIT: This unit is an AC power shelf that can be mounted
separately on the rack. For more information, see Installing the
AC_CONV_UNIT (on page 3-31).
In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Phillips
screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections
provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional
procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.
CAUTION: If additional equipment other than BG-30 shelves

is used in the rack, a heat buffer must be installed between
such equipment and the BG-30 shelf to minimize the transfer
of heat from shelf to shelf. Consult your ECI Telecom
representative regarding the exact heat buffer required.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the RAP-BG

Before You Start:
Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (on page 2-11).
For a description of the RAP-BG, refer to the BroadGate Product Line
Reference Manual.
To install the RAP-BG:

1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the RAP-BG in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-BG to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-BG.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the BroadGate shelves to the RAP-BG.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check power wiring.
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be
connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V)
must be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead
(-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that
describe DC power cable connections, use cables with
appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area
of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the
RAP-BG source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
NOTE: When the RAP-BG provides power to a single

BroadGate shelf, lower gauge cables may be used. Refer to
DC Power Cables (on page 2-11) for DC power cable
requirements.

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared

at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are
not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the
lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.
Installing the RAP-BG

The RAP-BG is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack.

 Attach the RAP-BG to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-BG:

1. The RAP-BG grounding stud is located on its rear cover. Use the following
figure to identify it.
Figure 3-3: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements

described in Grounding Requirements (on page 2-18).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-BG grounding
stud, using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.

Maintenance Manual
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-BG:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
RAP-BG by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-4: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover and remove
the cover.
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board
by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side;
a similar board is used at source B side).
Figure 3-5: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-BG power terminal
board.

Maintenance Manual
4. Bring the two leads of DC source A input power cable to the appropriate
RAP-BG opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
the power terminal board (see the previous figure).
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut
with a torque of 1450 N cm to 1600 N cm.
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.
During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the RAP-BG
DC connections in Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG (on page 3-
11).
To connect the DC power cables to a shelf:

RAP-BG.
2. Insert the DC power cable end, terminated with lugs, of the BG-30 shelf
through the opening for shelf power cables connecting to source A. If more
shelves are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Shelf 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the shelf power cable to the positive stud terminal
of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Shelf 1 on the power terminal board.

Maintenance Manual

7. Identify the shelves grounding terminals located on the inner side panel of
the RAP-BG according to the following figure.
Figure 3-6: RAP-BG shelf power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the shelf power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-BG side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If more BG-30 shelves are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for each
shelf power cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the
shelves to source B.
12. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to
the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.

Maintenance Manual
To install the RAP-BG circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-BG front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover to the RAP-BG chassis and
remove the cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration).
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG circuit breakers installation
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
RAP-BG source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more shelves are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding shelf positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source
B circuit breakers.

Maintenance Manual
To check DC voltage polarity:

1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements (on page 2-18)).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-BG.
3. Set all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to ON.
4. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative contacts of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the BG-30 shelf, as seen
when looking into the connector.
Figure 3-9: Shelf DC input power connector pin functions
5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to
-57.6 VDC), and that it has the correct polarity.
6. Return all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-BG input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-BG front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the RAP-4B

Before You Start:
Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (on page 2-11).
For a description of the RAP-4B, refer to the BroadGate Product Line
Reference Manual.
To install the RAP-4B:

1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the RAP-4B in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-4B to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-4B.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the BroadGate shelves to the RAP-4B.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check power wiring.
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be
connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V)
must be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead
(-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that
describe DC power cable connections, use cables with
appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area
of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the
RAP-4B source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
NOTE: When the RAP-4B provides power to a single

BroadGate shelf, lower gauge cables may be used. Refer to
DC Power Cables (on page 2-11) for DC power cable
requirements.

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared at

the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are not
connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.
Installing the RAP-4B

The RAP-4B is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack.
To install the RAP-4B:

 Attach the RAP-4B to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-4B:

1. The RAP-4B grounding stud is located on its rear cover. Use the following
figure to identify it.
Figure 3-10: Location of RAP-4B grounding stud
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements

described in Grounding Requirements (on page 2-18).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-4B grounding
stud, using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.

Maintenance Manual
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B:

RAP-4B by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-11: Identification of RAP-4B cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover and remove
the cover.
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board
by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side;
a similar board is used at source B side).
Figure 3-12: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-4B power terminal
board.

Maintenance Manual
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source A input power cable to the
appropriate RAP-4B opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.
During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the RAP-4B
DC connections in Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B (on page 3-
18).
To connect the DC power cable to a shelf:

RAP-4B.
2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of the BG-30 shelf
through the opening for shelf power cables connecting to source A. If more
shelves are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Shelf 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the shelf power cable to the positive stud terminal
of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Shelf 1 on the power terminal board.

Maintenance Manual

7. Identify the shelves grounding terminals located on the inner side panel of
the RAP-4B according to the following figure.
Figure 3-13: RAP-4B shelf power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the shelf power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-4B side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If more BG-30 shelves are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for each
shelf power cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the
shelves to source B.
12. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to
the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.

Maintenance Manual
To install the RAP-4B circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-4B front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover to the RAP-4B chassis and
remove the cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-14: RAP-4B front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to power circuit A of shelf 1 (the

circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration).
Figure 3-15: RAP-4B circuit breakers installation
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
RAP-4B source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more shelves are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding shelf positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source
B circuit breakers.

Maintenance Manual
To Check DC Voltage Polarity
To check DC voltage polarity:

1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements (on page 2-18)).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-4B.
3. Set all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to ON.
4. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative contacts of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the BG-30 shelf, as seen
Figure 3-16: Shelf DC input power connector pin functions
5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to
-57.6 VDC), and that it has the correct polarity.
6. Return all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-4B input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-4B front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Fiber Storage Tray

The FST should be installed 50 mm below the fiber guide. If additional
equipment is installed below the FST, such as another BG-30 shelf, an
additional 50 mm must be left free between the FST and such equipment.
To mount the FST in the rack:

1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. When preparing the fiber,
refer also to the safety information appearing in Work and Equipment
Safety (on page 2-17) and Power Supply Requirements.
3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack, or the rack sidewalls in case of an ETSI B rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull
the FST towards you to open it.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-17: Threading optical fibers in the FST

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside

the FST and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.

8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.
CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are

closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with
the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap
until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding
connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a
cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm.
Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission
characteristics.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the ODF

Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the
following procedures.
The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mounting brackets: one for 19” and
ETSI racks, and the other for 23” 7-foot bay racks. The 19”/ETSI rack
mounting brackets can be used for both ETSI A and ETSI B racks.
To attach the rack mounting brackets to the ODF:

 Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mounting
brackets, and attach each bracket to the corresponding ODF side panel with
three screws.
Figure 3-18: Attaching rack mounting brackets to the ODF

Maintenance Manual
To connect optical fibers to the ODF:

1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the
latch and pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.
Figure 3-19: ODF front panel
Figure 3-20: ODF open view
2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF
components.
3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the
ODF splice support.

Maintenance Manual
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.
Figure 3-21: ODF fiber routes
5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area.
6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.
7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail,
and slide the splicing sleeve over the splice.
8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.
NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF,

first start filling the slots of the lower splice support. After the
slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and
continue filling the support slots.
9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step
3.
10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.
11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up until it clicks to the unit.
12. Refer to “To attach the rack mounting brackets to the ODF” procedure and
secure the user fibers with cable ties to the fiber fastening bracket at the
rear of the ODF.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the

cable ties.

Maintenance Manual
To install ODF units in a rack:

 Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack
side rails with four screws.
Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel

The BG-30 only supports balanced E1s directly. For unbalanced E1s, the
xDDF-21 must be installed with the BG-30. The xDDF-21 provides
balanced-to-unbalanced conversion for 21 E1s. The number of xDDF-21 units
that should be installed with one BG-30B unit is based on the number of
PME1_21 modules (for the number of unbalanced E1s required).
To install an xDDF-21 patch panel:

1. Route the 100-pin SCSI cables leading from the E1 interfaces on the
PME1_21 panel along the side of the rack to the location where the
xDDF-21 patch panel is to be installed.
2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the
rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and must
be connected to their respective connectors.
3. Attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and
make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the
inside of the panel door.
Installing the PIM2_63 Cable Guide and

Holder
The PIM2_63 cable guide and holder keeps the cable in the right position, so
that cable will not interrupt closing the rack's door. The cable guide must be
installed above the BG-30 shelf.
To install the PIM2_63 cable guide and holder:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the PIM2_63 cable guide and holder in
the rack in accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the PIM2_63 cable guide and holder in the prescribed position and
then fasten the unit to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and
nuts.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the ICP_MCP30

To distribute the concentrated Auxiliary connector on the MCP30B panel into
dedicated connectors for each function, an interconnection panel (ICP) for the
MCP30B was developed. The ICP is connected to the MCP30B module
through a back-to-back cable with 36-pin SCSI connectors on both sides. The
ICP_MCP30 can be installed anywhere in the rack.
To install an ICP_MCP30:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP_MCP30 in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ICP_MCP30 in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing
pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side
rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-22: Installing ICP_MCP30 in the rack

Maintenance Manual
Installing SM_10E ICPs

To simplify installation and connection to customer termination equipment,
three types of ICPs were developed. The ICP is connected to the SM_10E
module using a special cable that spreads the condensed cable to connector
types commonly used for each service. Each ICP can serve one SM_10E traffic
module. An ICP can be installed anywhere in the rack.
To install an SM_10E ICP:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP in the rack in accordance with
the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ICP in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing pins to
hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side rails
with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-23: Installing SM_10E ICPs in the rack

Maintenance Manual
Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT

The AC_CONV_UNIT is an AC power shelf that can be mounted separately
on the rack. The AC_CONV_UNIT is supplied with one set of combined rack
mounting brackets for 19” and ETSI racks. The 19”/ETSI rack mounting
brackets can be used for both ETSI A and ETSI B racks.
Before you start:

Be sure to identify the prescribed AC_CONV_UNIT locations in the rack
before performing the following procedure.
To install an AC_CONV_UNIT:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack in
2. Place the AC_CONV_UNIT in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place. Then fasten the shelf to the
rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-24: Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B Shelf in

the Rack
Each BG-30B shelf is supplied with two installed INF_30B or INF_30BH
modules, one installed FCU_30B or FCU_30BH module, and all other slots
empty (Tslots are covered by blank panels if they are to remain empty).
Therefore, the installation activities covered in this section include:
 Installing the Rail Stiffeners (on page 3-33)
 Installing the BG-30B Shelf in the Rack (on page 3-32)
 Grounding the BG-30B Shelf (on page 3-34)
After the activities presented in this section have been completed, the BG-30B
shelf is ready for:
 Installing the MCP30B Module (on page 3-39)
 Installing XIO30 Modules in the BG-30B (on page 3-46)
 Installing Tslot Modules in the BG-30B (on page 3-47)
 Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in the AC_CONV_UNIT (on page 3-
48)
 Installing SFP Modules (on page 3-49)

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Rail Stiffeners

If you install the BG-30B in the rack without installing rail stiffeners, the rear
side of the BG-30B shelf will be slightly lower than the front side, due to the
weight of the BG-30B shelf. This makes installation of the BG-30E very
difficult. The rail stiffeners ensure that the BG-30B is level after it is installed
in the rack. Two rail stiffeners are shipped along with the BG-30B shelf.
CAUTION: Currently, to install the BG-30E on the BG-30B,

rack stiffeners must be installed.
To install the rail stiffeners:

1. Locate the two rail stiffeners included as part of the BG-30B shelf package.
2. Determine the position for the rail stiffener on the rack’s left side rail
according to the position of the BG-30B shelf in the rack and in accordance
with the rack installation plan.
3. Place the rail stiffener on the rear side of the rack’s left side rail.
4. Fasten the rail stiffener to the rack’s left side rail with two M6 screws and
washers through the uppermost and lowermost holes of the rail stiffener.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to install the second rail stiffener on the rack’s right
side rail.
Figure 3-25: Installing the rail stiffeners in the rack

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the BG-30B Shelf in the Rack
WARNING: Before starting, make sure that the DC power is

not connected to the rack and that the circuit breakers in the
RAP, if used, are set to OFF.
Before you start:

Review the grounding requirements specified in Before You Start (on page 2-
1). Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the grounding
connections in accordance with these requirements.
To attach a BG-30B shelf to an ECI Telecom recommended

rack:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-30B shelf in the rack in
2. Place the BG-30B shelf in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing
pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side
rails (to the second and third lowest screws in the rail stiffeners) with four
M6 screws and washers.
Grounding the BG-30B Shelf

Before you start:
Review the grounding requirements specified in Preparing Cables and Fibers
(on page 2-10). Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the
grounding connections in accordance with these requirements.
To ground the BG-30B shelf:

 BG-30B shelf grounding is achieved by connecting the shelf to the rack
using rack mounting brackets. Grounding is provided by contact when the
unit is fastened to the rack.

Maintenance Manual
Identifying Slots in the BG-30B

The BG-30B shelf consists of the following slots:
 Two power supply module slots
 One MCP30 slot
 Two XIO30 card slots
 One fan unit slot
 Three traffic card slots (Tslots)
The following figure identifies the slots arrangement in the BG-30B shelf.
Figure 3-26: BG-30B slots
The following table lists the modules that can be configured in each slot in the
BG-30B.
Table 3-2: BG-30B modules
Name Applicable slots in BG-30B

DC PSA DC PSB AC PS MS XS A XS B TS 1# TS 2# TS 3# FS
INF_30B √ √
INF_30BH √ √
AC_CONV_30B √
FCU_30B √
FCU_30BH √
MCP30 √
MCP30B √
XIO30_1 √ √
XIO30_4 √ √
XIO30Q_1&4 √ √
XIO30_16 √ √
PME1_21 √ √ √
PME1_63 √ √ √
PM345_3 √ √ √
SMD1B √ √ √
SMQ1 √ √ √
SMQ1&4 √ √ √

Maintenance Manual
Name Applicable slots in BG-30B

DC PSA DC PSB AC PS MS XS A XS B TS 1# TS 2# TS 3# FS
SMS4 √ √ √
SMD4 √ √
DMEoP_4 √ √ √
DMFE_4_L1 √ √ √
DMFX_4_L1 √ √ √
DMGE_1_L1 √ √ √
DMGE_4_L1 √ √ √
DMFE_4_L2 √ √ √
DMFX_4_L2 √ √ √
DMGE_2_L2 √ √ √
DMGE_4_L2 √ √ √
All cards support live insertion. Except for the INF_30B, INF_30BH,
FCU_30B and FCU_30BH, all other modules have the same dimensions.
During module installation, refer to BG-30B slots (on page 3-35) and BG-30B
modules to ensure that you are inserting modules into their applicable slots.
Modules are designed so that they cannot be inserted into the wrong slot.
CAUTION: The mechanics in the shelf and module panels

block the insertion of a module into an incorrect slot. When
inserting a module, if resistance is felt before the connectors
are flush, check whether it is inserted into the correct slot. Do
not exert excessive force to insert the module, as this may
damage the BG-30 shelf and the module.

Maintenance Manual
Installing Power Modules in the BG-30B

Each BG-30B shelf must have two DC power modules (INF_30B or
INF_30BH) or one AC power module (AC_CONV_30B) installed in the power
module slot. The BG-30B is always shipped with two DC power modules or
one AC power module (AC_CONV_30B) installed. The procedure described in
this section is therefore only relevant when you want to replace the power
module.
Figure 3-27: Installing a power module in the BG-30B
To install a power module in the BG-30B shelf:

1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Hold the INF_30B or INF_30BH module extractor and insert the rear end
of the module into the card guides.
4. Push the module in until the panel at the front of the module is flush with
the front of the BG-30B shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors are
flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening its two captive screws.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the FCU_30B or FCU_30BH in the

BG-30B
Each BG-30B shelf must have one Fan Control module (FCU_30B or
FCU_30BH) installed in the FCU slot. The BG-30B is therefore always
shipped with an FCU_30B or FCU_30BH module installed. The procedure
described in this section is therefore only relevant when you want to replace the
module.
Figure 3-28: Installing an FCU_30B/ FCU_30BH module in the BG-30B
To install an FCU_30B or FCU_30BH module in the BG-30B

shelf:
3. Hold the FCU_30B or FCU_30BH module extractor and insert the rear end
of the module into the card guides.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the MCP30B Module

The BG-30B shelf is always delivered without the MCP30B installed. It must
therefore be installed in the field. This section describes the installation
procedure for MCP30B modules.
There is a pluggable SD card inside the MCP30B, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 3-29: Location of the SD card inside the MCP30
The MCP30B cannot work without a proper SD card. Only SD cards supplied
by ECI Telecom must be installed. The MCP30B is always delivered without
the SD card installed, so it must be installed in the field. The installation of the
MCP30B includes the following steps:
 Installing an SD card in the MCP30B
 Installing the MCP30B in the BG-30B shelf

Maintenance Manual
To install an SD card in the MCP30B:
Figure 3-30: Installing the SD card into the MCP30B
1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Hold the SD card and insert the rear end of the card into the SD slot of the
MCP30B. The obtuse angle of the card must be placed towards the slot
near the panel side.
4. Push the SD card in until it clicks in place.

Maintenance Manual
To install an MCP30B module in the BG-30B shelf:
Figure 3-31: Installing an MCP30B module in the BG-30B
3. Hold the MCP30B module extractor and insert the rear end of the power
module into the card guides of the MS slot.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening the two screws with a
screwdriver.

Maintenance Manual
Installing MCP30 Modules

The BG-30B shelf is always delivered without an MCP30 module installed. It
must therefore be installed in the field. This section describes the installation
procedure for MCP30 modules.
There is a pluggable SD card inside the MCP30, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 3-32: Location of the SD card inside the MCP30
The MCP30 cannot work without a proper SD card. Only SD cards supplied by
ECI Telecom must be installed. The MCP30 is always delivered without the
SD card installed, so it must be installed in the field. The installation of the
MCP30 includes the following steps:
 Installing an SD card in the MCP30
 Installing the MCP30 in the BG-30B shelf

Maintenance Manual
To install an SD card in the MCP30:
Figure 3-33: Installing the SD card into the MCP30B
3. Hold the SD card and insert the rear end of the card into the SD slot of the
MCP30. The obtuse angle of the card must be placed towards the slot near
the panel side.

Maintenance Manual
There is a pluggable CF card inside the MCP30B/D, as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 3-34: Location of the CF card inside the MCP30B/D
The MCP30B/D cannot work without a proper CF card. Only CF cards

supplied by ECI Telecom must be installed. The MCP30B/D is always
delivered without the CF card installed, so it must be installed in the field. The
installation of the MCP30B/D includes the following steps:
Installing a CF card in the MCP30B/D
Installing the MCP30B/D in the BG-30B shelf
To install a CF card in the MCP30B/D:
Figure 3-35: Installing a CF card into the MCP30B/D

Maintenance Manual
3. Hold the CF card and insert the rear end of the card into the CF slot of the
MCP30B/D. The obtuse angle of the card must be placed towards the slot
near the panel side.
To install an MCP30 module in the BG-30B shelf:
Figure 3-36: Installing an MCP30B module in the BG-30B
3. Hold the MCP30 module extractor and insert the rear end of the power
module into the card guides of the MS slot.
screwdriver.

Maintenance Manual
Installing XIO30 Modules in the BG-30B

Each BG-30B shelf must have two XIO30 modules installed. For a list of
available XIO30 modules and their technical descriptions, refer to the
BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
The BG-30B shelf is always delivered without XIO30 modules installed, and
they therefore must be installed in the field. This section describes the
installation procedure.
Figure 3-37: Installing an XIO30 module in the BG-30B
To install an XIO30 in the BG-30B shelf:

3. Hold the XIO30 extractor and insert its rear end into the module guides of
one of the XS slots.

Maintenance Manual
Installing Tslot Modules in the BG-30B

The BG-30B shelf has three Tslots. The BG-30B shelf is always delivered with
all Tslots empty (covered by blank panels), and the modules must therefore be
installed in the field according to the site installation plan. This section
describes the installation procedure.
For a list of available Tslot modules and their technical descriptions, refer to
the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
Figure 3-38: Installing a Tslot module in the BG-30B
To install a Tslot module in the BG-30B shelf:

1. Loosen the two screws of the Tslot blank panel and remove it.
2. Check that the Tslot module has not been physically damaged during
shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is
sealed.
3. Remove the Tslot module from its antistatic protection packaging and
perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any
problems.
4. Hold the Tslot module extractor and insert its rear end into the module
guides.
5. Push the module in until the front of the module is flush with the front of
the BG-30B shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.

Maintenance Manual
Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in the

AC_CONV_UNIT
The AC_CONV_UNIT has two slots for installing AC_CONV_MODULEs.
The AC_CONV_ UNIT is always delivered with all AC_CONV_MODULEs
empty, covered by blank panels, and they therefore must be installed in the
field according to the site installation plan. This section describes the
installation process.
Figure 3-39: Installing an AC_CONV_MODULE in the AC_CONV_UNIT
To install an AC_CONV_MODULE in the AC_CONV_UNIT

shelf:
1. Loosen the two screws of the AC_CONV_MODULE blank panel and
remove it.
2. Check that the AC_CONV_MODULE has not been physically damaged
during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original
packaging is sealed.
3. Remove the AC_CONV_MODULE from its antistatic protection
packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during
shipping. Report any problems.
4. Hold the AC_CONV_MODULE extractor and insert its rear end into the
module guides.
the AC_CONV_UNIT shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and
repeat the procedure.

Maintenance Manual
Installing SFP Modules

All XIO30 modules are shipped without SFP modules installed. Proper SFPs
must be installed in the field according to the field installation plan.
ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers in all optical
interfaces and electrical STM-1 interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided
you observe all safety precautions during the replacement described in Before
You Start (on page 2-1).
NOTE: Only SFP modules supplied by ECI Telecom can be

used in the BG-30. Otherwise, the laser in the SFP module
will always shut down.
Figure 3-40: Installing an SFP/XFP module in the BG
To install an SFP transceiver:

1. Check that the SFP has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
2. Remove the SFP from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Insert the rear end of the SFP module plug-in into the prescribed position,
and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place. If you feel resistance before the transceiver plug-in is
fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the insertion.
4. Lock the SFP module by closing the buckle if the module has a locking
mechanism.
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for other SFPs (if required).

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30E Shelf in

the Rack
A very important differentiator of the BG-30 is that it consists of BG-30B and
BG-30E shelves, thus providing a better pay-as-you-grow solution. The
BG-30B can cover a large percentage of applications. For more add-drop
capacity and additional functionality, such as Ethernet L2 and PCM, a BG-30E
can be added to the BG-30B. The BG-30E supports live insertion and can be
installed at any time without affecting the traffic running on the BG-30B. The
BG-30E can also be installed when installing the BG-30B.
Each BG-30E shelf is supplied with a power module slot and all extension
slots, which are initially empty. The three extension slots are covered by a
cover panel.
The installation activities covered in this section include:
 Installing the H Connector (on page 3-51)
 Installing the BG-30E Shelf on the BG-30B Shelf (on page 3-52)
 Attaching the BG-30E Shelf in the Rack (on page 3-55)
After these activities have been completed, the BG-30E shelf is ready for:
 Installing Power Modules in the BG-30E (on page 3-57)
 Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E (on page 3-58)
 Installing Extension Cards in the BG-30E (on page 3-59)
 Installing SFP Modules in the ESW_2G_8F_E (on page 3-63)
 Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E (on page 3-64)
WARNING: Before starting to install the BG-30E, make sure

that the DC power cable is not connected to the BG-30E, and
that the circuit breakers in the RAP, if used, are set to OFF.
CAUTION: Before adding the BG-30E shelf to the BG-30B,

ensure that the rail stiffeners have been installed. If the rail
stiffeners are not installed, it is highly recommended that you
first remove the BG-30B from the rack and then install the
rail stiffeners before proceeding with the BG-30E installation.
For more details, see Installing the Rail Stiffeners (on page 3-
33).

Maintenance Manual
Installing the H Connector

The H connector connects the BG-30B shelf to the BG-30E shelf.
Figure 3-41: Installing the H connector
To install the H connector:

1. Remove the cover plate by releasing the two screws.
2. Fasten the Pilot pin into the screw hole by hand.
3. Insert the H connector assembly into the internal connectors, and then
fasten it on the cover by screwing in its two handles.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30E Shelf on the BG-30B

Shelf
The BG-30E shelf is mounted on the top of the BG-30B shelf using the
H connector.
Figure 3-42: Installing the BG-30E
To install the BG-30E shelf on the BG-30B shelf:

1. Fasten the two pilot pins for the BG-30E onto the cover by hand.
2. Mount the BG-30E on the BG-30B using the vertical pilot pins and holes at
the bottom of the BG-30E.
3. Ensure that the connectors for the H connector and the BG-30E are
completely matched.
4. Insert the six snap rivets into the holes on the bottom of the BG-30E.
5. Verify that the caps of the rivets are flat on the bottom of the BG-30E.
6. Fasten the four fastener screws (SST PH M6 x 16) to the mounting flange
of the BG-30E.

Maintenance Manual
Disassembling the BG-30E from the BG-30B

In some cases it might be necessary to disassemble the BG-30E from the
BG-30B shelf. The following procedure describes the correct way to do it. The
BG-30E is attached to the BG-30B with six snap rivets; you must first remove
these rivets before removing the BG-30E. It is recommended to use a thin flat
tool (like a screwdriver) to raise the rivet caps first, and then remove the rivets.
Figure 3-43: Removing the BG-30E from the BG-30B

Maintenance Manual
To disassemble the BG-30E from the BG-30B:

1. Insert a thin flat-head screwdriver under the rivet cap.
Figure 3-44: Inserting the thin flat-head tool
2. Raise the rivet cap by the screwdriver.
Figure 3-45: Raising the rivet cap
3. Remove the rivet with your hand.
Figure 3-46: Removing the rivet
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to remove the other rivets.

5. Raise the BG-30E from the BG-30B and remove it.
6. Disassemble the pin guides and the H-connector from the BG-30B.

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the BG-30E Shelf in the Rack

The BG-30E shelf can be mounted on the rack after it has been assembled with
the BG-30B, or added to a BG-30B shelf mounted on the rack.
To attach a BG-30E shelf to an ECI Telecom recommended

rack:
 Fasten the BG-30E shelf to the rack side rails with four M6 screws,
washers, and nuts. BG-30E shelf grounding is achieved by connecting the
shelf to the rack using rack mounting brackets. Grounding is provided by
contact when the unit is fastened to the rack.
Identifying Slots in the BG-30E

The layout of the BG-30E is depicted in the following figures.
Figure 3-47: BG-30E regular slots layout
Figure 3-48: BG-30E slots layout with ES 3# extended
The figures show two possible arrangements for the BG-30E slots layout. The
upper figure shows the regular layout of the BG-30E. The lower figure is very
similar to the first, with an extension arrangement for the uppermost slot (ES
3#).
The BG-30E shelf consists of the following slots:
 Two slots (PS A and PS B) for installing two DC power supply modules or
one AC power supply module
 One slot (FS) for installing a fan module
 Three slots (ES 1#, ES 2#, ES 3#) for accommodating expansion traffic
card (Eslots)
 Slot ES 3# (can be extended) for housing a long card (TP63_1)

Maintenance Manual
The following table lists the modules supported in V13 that can be configured
in each slot in the BG-30E.
Table 3-3: BG-30E modules
Name Applicable slots in BG-30E

PS A PS B AC PS ES 1# ES 2# ES 3# ES 3# Extended FS
INF_30E √ √
FCU_30E √
AC_CONV_30E √
SM_10E √ √ √
PE1_63 √ √ √
P345_3E √ √ √
S1_4 √ √ √
S4_1 √ √ √
ESW_2G_8F_E √ √ √
MPS_2G_8F √ √ √
TP21_2 √ √ √
TPS1_1 √ √ √
TP63_1 √

Maintenance Manual
Installing Power Modules in the BG-30E

Each BG-30E shelf must have power modules installed in the power module
slot. Either two INF_30Es (for a DC power supply) or one AC_CONV_30E
(for an AC power supply) can be configured according to the site installation
plan. The BG-30E shelf is always shipped with the power module slot empty.
Figure 3-49: Installing the power module in the BG-30E
To install power modules in the BG-30E:

3. Insert the rear end of the power module into the card guides.
the front of the BG-30E shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors are
screwdriver.

Maintenance Manual
Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E

Each BG-30E shelf must have one Fan Control module (FCU_30E) installed in
the FCU slot. The BG-30E is always shipped with an FCU_30E module
installed. The procedure described in this section is therefore only relevant
when you want to replace the module.
Figure 3-50: Installing an FCU_30E in the BG-30E
To install an FCU_30E in the BG-30E:

3. Hold the FCU_30E module extractor and insert the rear end of the power
module into the card guides.
the front of the BG-30E shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors are
screwdriver.

Maintenance Manual
Installing Extension Cards in the BG-30E

This section describes how to install extension cards in the BG-30E. For a list
of available extension cards and their technical descriptions, refer to the
To install an extension card in the BG-30E:
Figure 3-51: Installing an extension card in the BG-30E
1. Identify the Eslot in which you want to install the extension card according
to the site installation plan.
2. Loosen the two screws on the Eslot cover and remove it.
3. Check that the extension card has not been physically damaged during
sealed.
4. Remove the extension card from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
5. Hold the extension card handles and insert its rear end into the card guides.
6. Push the card in until the front of the card is flush with the front of the
BG-30E shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat the
procedure.
7. Secure the card in place by fastening its two captive screws.
NOTE: Extension cards support live insertion. They can be

installed at any time without affecting the existing traffic
running on the BG-30B or BG-30E.

Maintenance Manual
Installing TP63_1 Cards in the BG-30E

This section describes the installation of TP63_1 cards in the BG-30E. For a
list of available IOP cards and their technical descriptions, refer to the
Before you start

Before installing the TP63_1 card, you must remove the blank pane, covering
the additional expansion space to the left of slot ES 3# and the card guide at left
side of the slot.
To prepare the extension of the ES 3# slot:

1. Open the two screws fastening the blank panel to the left of slot ES 3#, and
remove it.
Figure 3-52: Removing the blank panel

Maintenance Manual
2. Open the FH M1.6 screw fastening the card guide in the left side of ES 3#,
and remove it.
Figure 3-53: Removing the card guide
WARNING: Prevent the card guide touching other cards,

while the system is operating.

Maintenance Manual
To install the TP63_1 in the BG-30E:

1. Identify the ES 3# slot in which you want to install the TP63_1 card
according to the site installation plan (must be ES 3#).
2. Check that the TP63_1 has not been physically damaged during shipment,
3. Remove the TP63_1 card from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
4. Hold the TP63_1 handles and insert the rear end of the TP63_1 into the
card guides.
Figure 3-54: Installing a TP63_1 card in the BG-30E
5. Push the TP63_1 in until the front of the card is flush with the front of the
BG-30E shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Fasten the three captive screws on the card panel and secure it in place.
NOTE: TP63_1 cards support live insertion. They can be

installed at any time without affecting the existing traffic
running on the BG-30E.

Maintenance Manual
Installing SFP Modules in the ESW_2G_8F_E

All ESW_2G_8F_E cards are shipped without SFP modules installed for GbE
interfaces. If a GbE interface is needed, the proper SFP module must be
installed in the field according to the field installation plan.
ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers for GbE interfaces.
Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the safety precautions
described in Before You Start (on page 2-1) during the replacement.
NOTE: Only GbE SFP modules supplied by ECI Telecom

can be used in the ESW_2G_8F_E. Otherwise, the laser in the
SFP module always shuts down.
To install an SFP transceiver in the ESW_2G_8F_E:

 Use the same procedure as described in Installing SFP Modules (on page 3-
49) to install an SFP transceiver in the ESW_2G_8F_E.

Maintenance Manual
Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E

The SM_10E consists of a base card and up to three traffic modules. This
section describes the installation procedure for traffic modules. For a list of
available traffic modules and their technical descriptions, refer to the
The SM_10E card is supplied without traffic module installed; the
corresponding slots are covered by blank panels.
To install a traffic module in the SM_10E card:
Figure 3-55: Installing a traffic module on the SM_10E
1. Loosen the two screws fastening the blank panel to the SM_10E front, and
remove it.
2. Check that the traffic module has not been physically damaged during
sealed.
3. Remove the traffic module from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
4. Hold the traffic module handle and insert its rear end into the traffic module
slot guides.

Maintenance Manual
the SM_10E. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Fasten the module in place with its two captive screws.
NOTE: SM_10E modules support live insertion. They can be

installed at any time without affecting existing traffic running
on the platform, including the SM_10E.
Connecting Fibers and Cables to

the BG-30 Shelf
In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data
cables must be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers must be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the rack.
Electrical traffic and other cables (DC, alarm, management, timing, and so on)
must be routed along the side of the rack, and held in place with cable ties.
Connecting Power and Alarm Cables to a DC

Power Source
Follow these steps to connect power and alarm cables to a DC power source.
To connect power and alarm cables:

1. Route the power cables leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate BG-30B shelf.
NOTE: For further details about the RAP installation

procedure, see Installing the RAP-BG (on page 3-9) or
Installing the RAP-4B (on page 3-16).
2. Connect the end of the DC power cable from one source, terminating with a
3-pin D-type female connector in accordance with the rack installation plan
and the cable tags, to the DC power connector on one INF_30B or
INF_30BH.
3. Connect the end of the DC power cable from the second source,
terminating with a 3-pin D-type female connector in accordance with the
rack installation plan and the cable tags, to the DC power connector on the
second INF_30B or INF_30BH.

Maintenance Manual
4. Route the alarm cable leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate BG-30B shelf (if an ICP_MCP30 is not installed) or to the
appropriate ICP_MCP30 (if an ICP_MCP30 is installed).
5. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags, to the Auxiliary connector on the
MCP30B (if an ICP_MCP30 is not installed) or Alarms connector on the
front panel of the ICP_MCP30 (if installed).
6. Secure the cable connector to the MCP30B or ICP_MCP30 connector with
the cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot
reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver (maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N
cm to 44 N cm.
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules

Before installing the BG-30 shelf and modules, all optical fibers must be routed
through the conduits running along the front supports of the ECI Telecom
recommended rack into the FST under the BG-30 shelf being installed, and
threaded into the FST. For more information, see Installing the Fiber Storage
Tray (on page 3-23).
All optical fibers in the BG-30 shelf are connected to the LC connectors on the
optical SFP transceivers in the front panel of the XIO30 modules.

characteristics.

Maintenance Manual
To connect an optical fiber to an SFP module:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the
fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it
fully.
3. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the optical transceiver
LC connector on the designated module. Leave some slack to prevent
stress.
4. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers using an approved
cleaning kit.
5. Remove the cover from the optical transceiver. Connect the fiber connector
to the LC connector on the optical transceiver.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for all optical modules in the BG-30 shelf.
7. When you have completed the connection of all optical modules, gently
push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface

Cables to the BG-30
This section provides instructions for connecting cables to BG-30 shelves. The
information presented here supplements the information regarding the
connection of power, alarm, and grounding cables described in previous
sections.
Connect the cables to the equipment connectors according to the information
appearing in the relevant cabling diagrams or tables. To identify the physical
location of connectors, use the equipment panel figures in the BroadGate
Product Line Reference Manual.
Routing and Connecting E1 Cables for

Balanced E1 Interfaces
E1 cables are used for connecting the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces on the
PME1_21 panel. Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs (transmit
and receive) supporting 21 E1s. The cable end connecting to the PME1_21
module is terminated with a 100-pin SCSI male connector.
To connect E1 cables to the PME1_21:

1. Arrange the E1 traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each E1 cable down to the level of the BG-30 shelf.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the PME1_21 module with
the appropriate DDF connections.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connectors on the
PME1_21 front panel.
6. Secure the cable connector to the PME1_21 connector with the cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure

the cable connector, as this may damage the PME1_21.

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting E1 Cables for

Unbalanced E1 Interfaces
The PME1_21 can only provide balanced E1s directly. For unbalanced E1s, the
xDDF-21 patch panels must be installed with the BG-30. Each xDDF-21
provides balanced-to-unbalanced conversion for 21 E1s.
The cable between the PME1_21 and the xDDF-21 (supplied by ECI Telecom)
consists of 21 E1 twisted pairs (transmit and receive) supporting 21 balanced
E1s. The cable end connecting to the PME1_21 is terminated with a 100-pin
SCSI male connector. The cable end connecting to the xDDF-21 is terminated
with two 50-pin SCSI male connectors.
To connect E1 cables between the BG-30 and the xDDF-21:

1. Arrange the E1 traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull the 100-pin SCSI end of the cable down to the level of the BG-30
shelf.
4. Connect the cable connector to the E1 connectors on the front panel of the
PME1_21 module.
5. Secure the cable connector to the PME1_21 connectors with two cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
6. Pull the 2 x 50-pin SCSI end of the cable to the level of the xDDF-21.
7. Bend the cables and thread them through the side cable guides of the rack
and through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector
is positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to
fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
8. Connect the cable connector marked J1 to the 50-pin SCSI connector on the
xDDF-21 panel marked J1. Connect the cable connector marked J2 to the
50-pin SCSI connector on the xDDF-21 panel marked J2.
9. Secure the cable connectors to the xDDF-21 connectors with two cable
connector screws for each connector. Tighten the screws manually. If you
cannot reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
cm to 44 N cm.

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to

secure the cable connector, as this may damage the
PME1_21.
To connect E1 cables between the xDDF-21 and the external

DDF:
 Coaxial cables are used for connecting unbalanced E1s between the
xDDF-21 and the external DDF. A pair of coaxial cables is used for each
E1. These coaxial cables can be prepared on site. The cable end connecting
to the xDDF-21 is terminated with a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector. The connector
on the other end of the cable depends on the connector used in the external
DDF. For the connection of coaxial cables, refer to Routing and
Connecting Coaxial Cables (on page 3-73).
Traffic Cable for PME1_63

The PME1_63 has a special 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting
to its 63 x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by ECI Telecom is used to
make the connection.
The cable is constructed of three main parts:
 Double 136-pin VHDCI male connector with three pairs of 30AWG cable
tails
 Conversion cable-size box
 Three pairs of 26AWG cables

Maintenance Manual
The following figure shows the PME1_63 traffic cable.
Figure 3-56: PME1_63 traffic cable
The three 30AWG cable pairs connect on one side to the double 136-pin
VHDCI connector and on the other side to the conversion box. The conversion
box connects between the three 30AWG cable pairs and three pairs of 26AWG
cables, making the wire-size conversion. The 26AWG cables are connected at
the other end to the customer's DDF. Each cable in a pair is bonded to the
other, shaping a figure-eight pattern.
Each pair of the 26AWG cables carries 21 E1s, totaling 63 E1s; to facilitate
identification of the E1 groups each cable pair is marked with color strips along
its jacket, according to the following key:
 First pair, E1s No. 1 to 21 - Red strips
 Second pair, E1s No. 22 to 42 - Blue strips
 Third pair, E1s No. 43 to 63 - Yellow strips

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting E1 Cables to the

PME1_63
The PME1_63 has a 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting to its 63
x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by ECI Telecom is used to make the
connection. For a detailed description of the cable refer to Traffic Cable for
PME1_63 (on page 3-70). The connector on the cable has a pin guide that must
be inserted into the corresponding hole, to the lower left side of PME1_63
connector.
A cable guide and holder installed above the BG shelf helps neatly route of the
special PME1_63 cables. This unit makes it possible to keep the path of the
cable in the short rout between the module on the shelf and the conversion box
(on the cable).
To connect the PME1_63 traffic cable:

1. Identify the pin guide on the traffic cable connector and the corresponding
hole on the PME1_63.
2. Insert the pin guide into the corresponding hole near the PME1_63
connector.
3. Gently push the cable connector into the corresponding PME1_63
connector. If resistance is felt before the connectors are mate, pull the
connector out and repeat the procedure.
4. Secure the connector in place by tightening its four captive screws.
Figure 3-57: PME1_63 traffic cable installation

Maintenance Manual
To route the PME1_63 traffic cable:

1. Bend the cables from the connector installed in the previous procedure
towards the cable guide and holder unit (see the preceding figure).
2. Insert a Velcro strip into the corresponding holes in the cable guide, route
the cables through the strip and tighten the strip on the cables.
3. Place the cable conversion box on the BG shelf.
4. Route the 26AWG cables coming from the conversion box to the rack side
rails and tighten them to the rack's side rails, using cable ties.
5. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the PME1_63 with the
appropriate DDF connections.
Routing and Connecting Coaxial Cables

Individual coaxial cables are used for connecting the interfaces located on the
electrical STM-1 SFPs on the XIO30_1 and the xDDF-21.
As part of the site preparations, suitable cables must be routed from the
relevant DDF (if used) to the intended rack location and connected to DIN
1.0/2.3 connectors. Sufficient length must be available to permit routing the
cables to the appropriate level in the rack.
To connect individual coaxial traffic cables to the BG-30 or

xDDF-21:
1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups
according to the designated electrical interfaces and route them along the
guides at the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-30 unit or xDDF-21
unit.
2. Cut excess cable length, if necessary.
3. Connect the BG-30 or xDDF-21 end of the cables to DIN 1.0/2.3
connectors and the other end to the relevant coaxial cable connector,
crimping the cable as required.
4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack so
that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate adapter.
Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
5. Connect the connector on the cable to the corresponding electrical
connector on the BG-30 or the xDDF-21.
6. Connect the connector on the other end of cable to the corresponding
electrical connector on the external DDF.

Maintenance Manual
Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the

BG-30
Up to two traffic slots in the BG-30E can be configured with protection cards
to add I/O protection capabilities to the platform.
The protection card is connected to both operating and protection I/O modules
in the BG-30B or BG-30E shelf.
If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules, the MCP30
switches the traffic from the operating I/O module to the protection module.
The protection card is connected to the main and protection I/O modules by
traffic cables, and the client's traffic is connected directly to the protection card.
Protection cards support the electrical PDH and SDH modules with the
following protection schemes:
 Cards for a 1:1 protection scheme, where one protection module or card is
connected to a single I/O module or card
 Cards for a 1:2 protection scheme, where one protection module or card is
connected to one or two I/O modules or cards
The BG-30E connects to a connector on top of the BG-30B shelf. This
connector provides the power and control buses required for the protection card
operation.
The protection cards available are:
 TP21_2
 TP63_1
 TPS1_1
The following table summarizes the available TPs (Tributary Protection cards),
the type of I/O modules they protect, the traffic rate, and the protection scheme.
Table 3-4: Protection and protected cards summary
Protection card Protected I/O Traffic rate Protection scheme

type module/card
TP21_2 PME1_21 2 Mbps 1:2
TP63_1 PE1_63/3 x 2 Mbps 1:1
PME1_21
TPS1_1 PM345_3, 34/45 Mbps, 1:1
P345_3E, 155 Mbps
XIO30-1/4,
XIO30Q_1&4,
SMQ1&4

Maintenance Manual
Protection Jumper Cables for I/O Cards

ECI Telecom has defined a set of protection jumper cables to be used with the
various protection cards in the BG-30.
The following protection jumper cables are available:
 L114 - for TP21_1 operating in 1:2, or 1:1 protection schemes (one
PME1_21 protecting two PME1_21, or one PME1_21 protecting one
PME1_21).
 L123 - for TP63_1 cards operating in 1:1 protection scheme with PE1_63
cards (one PE1_63 protecting one PE1_63).
 L128 - for TP63_1 cards operating in 1:1 protection scheme with three
PME1_21 modules and one PE1_63 card (one PE1_63 protecting three
PME1_21 modules).
 L127 - for TPS1_1 cards operating in 1:1 protection scheme with different
STM-1 or DS-3/E3 cards/modules (one SMQ1&4, or XIO30Q_1&4, or
PM345_3, or P345_3E card/module protecting one card/module of the
same type).
The following sections detail the structure and usage of each cable.
Protection Jumper Cable for TP21_2 (L114)

The L114 protection jumper cable is used to connect the TP21_2 to PME1_21
in 1:2 or 1:1 protection schemes.
The jumper cable has a dual VHDCI 68-pin male connector on one end, and a
SCSI 100-pin male connector on the second end.
The following figure shows a schematic diagram of the L114 jumper cable.
Figure 3-58: L114 protection jumper cable schematic diagram

Maintenance Manual
Use the cable as follows:

 Use 3 x L114 cables for 1:2 protection with the TP21_2 card (one
PME1_21 (stand-by) module protects two PME1_21 (operating) modules).
 Use 2 x L114 cables for 1:1 protection with the TP21_2 card (one
PME1_21 (stand-by) module protects one PME1_21 (operating) module).
Protection Jumper Cables for TP63_1 (L123

and L128)
The L123 protection jumper cable is used to connect the TP63_1 to the PE1_63
in 1:1 protection scheme.
The jumper cable has 2 x dual VHDCI 68-pin male connectors on one end, and
3 x dual VHDCI 68-pin male connectors on the second end.

Maintenance Manual
The L128 protection jumper cable is used to connect the TP63_1 to 3 x

PME1_21 modules in 1:1 protection scheme. An L123 jumper cable is used to
connect the TP63_1 to a PE1_63 (stand-by) card in this configuration.
The L128 protection jumper cable has 2 x dual VHDCI 68-pin male connectors
on one end, and 3 x SCSI 100-pin male connectors on the second end.
Use the cables as follows:

 Use 2 x L123 cables for 1:1 protection with the TP63_1 card for PE1_63
protection (one PE1_63 (stand-by) card protects one PE1_63 (operating)
card).
 Use 1 x L128 cable and 1 x L123 cable with the TP63_1 card for PME1_21
protection (one PE1_63 (stand-by) card protects three PME1_21
(operating) modules).

Maintenance Manual
Protection Jumper Cable for TPS1_1 (L127)

The L127 protection jumper cable is used to connect the TPS1_1 to various
STM-1 or DS-3/E3 traffic cards/modules in 1:1 protection schemes.
The jumper cable has a DSUB 8W8 connector on one end and 8 x DIN 1.0/2.3
connectors on the other end.
Use the cable as follows:

 Use 2 x L127 cables for 1:1 protection with the TPS1_1 card (one STM-1,
or DS-3/E3 (stand-by) card/module protects one STM-1, or DS-3/E3
(operating) card/module of the same type).

Maintenance Manual
Protection Jumper Cables Usage

The following table summarizes the usage of jumper cables for I/O protection
in the BG-30.
Table 3-5: Protection jumper cables usage
TP card I/O card/module Jumper cable End connectors

(protection (qty) (qty)
scheme)
TP21_2 (1:2) PME1_21 (3) L114 (3) VHDCI68(dual port) to SCSI
100
TP21_2 (1:1) PME1_21 (2) L114 (2) VHDCI68(dual port) to SCSI
100
TP63_1 (1:1) PE1_63 (2) L123 (2) 2 x VHDCI68 (dual port) to 3
x VHDCI68 (dual port)
TP63_1 (1:1) PE1_63 (1) L123 (1) 2 x VHDCI68 (dual port) to 3
PME1_21 (3) L128 (1) x VHDCI68 (dual port)
VHDCI68 (dual port) to 3 x
SCSI 100
TPS1_1 (1:1) SMQ1&4 (2) L127 (2) DSUB 8W8 to 8 x DIN 1.0/2.3
TPS1_1 (1:1) XIO30Q_1&4 (2) L127 (2) DSUB 8W8 to 8 x DIN 1.0/2.3
TPS1_1 (1:1) PM345_3 (2) L127 (2) DSUB 8W8 to 8 x DIN 1.0/2.3
TPS1_1 (1:1) P345_3E (2) L127 (2) DSUB 8W8 to 8 x DIN 1.0/2.3
Connecting the TP21_2

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:2 protection scheme for a
BG-30 populated with PME1_21 modules in TS1, TS2 and TS3 slots of the
BG-30B and a TP21_2 card in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E. The TS3 slot in
the BG-30B designates the Protection module, and TS1 and TS2 slots the Main
(working) modules.
Figure 3-62: TP21_2 1:2 protection scheme example

Maintenance Manual
BG-30 populated with PME1_21 modules in TS2 and TS3 slots of the BG-30B
and a TP21_2 card in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E. The TS3 slot in the
BG-30B designates the Protection module, and the TS2 slot the Main
(working) module.
Figure 3-63: TP21_2 1:1 protection scheme example
Connecting the TP63_1

BG-30 populated with two PE1_63 cards in the ETS2 and ETS3 slots, and a
TP63_1 card in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E. The ETS3 slot in the BG-30E
designates the Protection card, and the ETS2 slot is the Main (working) card.
NOTE: This configuration is recommended for protection of

63 E1s.
Figure 3-64: TP63_1_1 (two PE1_63 cards) 1:1 protection scheme example

Maintenance Manual
BG-30 populated with one PE1_63 card in the ETS2 slot, and one TP63_1 card
in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E, and three PME1_21 modules in the TS1, TS2,
and TS3 slots of the BG-30B. The ETS2 slot in the BG-30E designates the
Protection card, and the TS1, TS2, TS3 slots are the Main (working) modules.
Figure 3-65: TP63_1_1 (three PME1_21 modules and one PE1_63 card) 1:1
protection scheme example
Connecting the TPS1_1

BG-30 populated with SMQ1&4 modules in TS2 and TS3 slots of the BG-30B,
and a TPS1_1 card in the ETS1 slot of the BG-30E. The TS3 slot in the
BG-30B designates the Protection module, and the TS2 slot is the Main
(working) module.
Figure 3-66: TPS1_1 (two SMQ1&4 modules) 1:1 protection scheme example
The following table describes the slot allocation for the TPS1_1 in 1:1
protection scheme for various STM-1 and DS-3/E3 traffic cards/modules.
Table 3-6: TPS1_1 1:1 I/O protection slot allocation
TP slots I/O slots allocation

Protection Main
ETS1,or ETS2, or ETS3 TS3 TS2
ETS1,or ETS2, or ETS3 XS3 XS2
ETS3 ETS2 ETS1
ETS1 ETS2 ETS3

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Data Interface

Cables to Ethernet Interfaces
Data cables with RJ-45 connectors are used for connecting Fast Ethernet
interfaces on data modules.
As part of the site preparations, Category 5 or better cables must be routed
from the relevant Ethernet DDF (if used) to the intended rack location and
connected to the RJ-45 connectors. Sufficient length must be available to
permit routing the cables to the appropriate level in the rack.
To connect data cables to an Ethernet interface:

1. Based on the site cabling diagram, route the data cables along the guides at
the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-30 unit.
2. Pull each data cable down to the level of the BG-30 unit.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack so
that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the BG-30 unit. Use
cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector
on the data module front panel.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Cables

between the MCP30 and the ICP_MCP30
If an ICP_MCP30 is installed, an electrical cable with SCSI-36 connectors on
both sides is used to connect the ICP_MCP30 to the MCP30.
To connect the cable between the MCP30 and the

ICP_MCP30:
1. Route the cable to the rack side rails.
2. Pull one end of the cable to the level of the BG-30 shelf.
4. Connect the cable connector to the Auxiliary connector on the MCP30 front
panel.

Maintenance Manual
5. Secure the cable connector to the SM_10E traffic module connector with
cm to 44 N cm.

the cable connector, as this may damage the MCP30 module.
6. Pull the other end of the cable to the level of the ICP_MCP30.
through the appropriate opening near the ICP_MCP30 until the cable
connector is positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as
required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
8. Connect the cable connector to the SCSI-36 connector on the ICP_MCP30
front panel.
9. Secure the cable connector to the connector marked as J1 on the
ICP_MCP30 front panel with the cable connector screws. Tighten the
screws manually. If you cannot reach the screws with your hands, use an
adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver (maximum blade size 0.6). Set the
tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N cm.

the cable connector, as this may damage the ICP_MCP30.
Connecting the Timing (Clock) Cable

The timing cable is connected to the T3/T4 RJ-45 connector on the MCP30.
To connect the timing cable to the MCP30:

1. Route the timing cable along the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-30B
shelf.
2. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags to the T3/T4 connector on the MCP30 front panel.

Maintenance Manual

4
BG-30B Wall-Mounted
Installations
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 4-2
Wall-Mounted Cabinet .................................................................................... 4-2
Installing the BG-30B in a Wall-Mounted Cabinet ......................................... 4-3
Installing the Interior Components .................................................................. 4-4
Installing Cabling Accessories ...................................................................... 4-10
DDF 21 E1s Unit ........................................................................................... 4-14
Installing the BG-30B and Three DDFs ........................................................ 4-18
Installing the BG-30B, Two DDFs, and an AC CONV Unit ........................ 4-21
Connecting Cabinet Grounding ..................................................................... 4-24
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the Cabinet ........................... 4-24
Installing the Wall-Mounted Cabinet Covers and Door ................................ 4-33
Wall-Mounted Frame .................................................................................... 4-37
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame .............................................................. 4-38
Installing the BG-30B and Accessories in the Wall-Mounted Frame ........... 4-42
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame Front Cover .......................................... 4-51
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame Grounding ............................................... 4-53
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the Frame ............................. 4-54

BG-30B Wall-Mounted Installations BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Overview
In addition to the regular installation of the BG-30B in different racks, ECI
Telecom offers two options for wall-mounted installations:
 Wall-Mounted Cabinet
 Wall-Mounted Frame
These options are ideal for installations in small businesses or home offices
(SOHO).
The following sections provide detailed procedures for these installations.
Wall-Mounted Cabinet
The wall-mounted cabinet is ideal for SOHO installations of communication
equipment. The unit is 352 mm high, 600 mm wide, and 400 mm deep, and has
a transparent front door. The cabinet includes a rear panel with four support
rails to which two 19" vertical extrusions are fastened. The equipment and
cabling accessories are attached to these extrusions.
The side, top, and bottom covers can easily and quickly be removed, providing
comfortable user-friendly access to the interior for installation and management
of all components.
The following figure shows a general view of the wall-mounted cabinet.
Figure 4-1: Wall-mounted cabinet general view

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and BG-30B Wall-Mounted Installations
Maintenance Manual
The wall-mounted cabinet is shipped dismantled in a flat-pack packaging,

saving up to 50 % of transportation volume and facilitating delivery to the
point of assembly.
The tools illustrated in the following figure are required for the installation (not
supplied with the cabinet).
Figure 4-2: Tools required for cabinet installation
Installing the BG-30B in a

Wall-Mounted Cabinet
The installation of a BG-30B in a wall-mounted cabinet includes the following
stages:
 Installing the wall-mounted cabinet rear panel
 Installing cabling accessories
 Installing the BG-30B shelf and ancillary equipment:
 Either three DDFs or
 Two DDFs and an AC CONV unit
 Connecting cables and fibers to the BG-30B shelf and ancillary equipment
 Installing the wall-mounted cabinet covers and front door

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Interior

Components
Before you start:
Unpack the wall-mounted cabinet components and perform a visual inspection
according to the instructions in Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection
(on page 3-5).
DANGER: Safety cannot be guaranteed if shipping damage

is evident! Shipping damage must be reported to the shipping
company and manufacturer immediately upon receipt.
The wall-mounted cabinet interior components are shown in the following

figure.
Figure 4-3: Wall-mount cabinet interior parts

Maintenance Manual
Preparing the Rear Panel Holes

Follow these steps to prepare the rear panel holes.
To prepare the rear panel holes:

1. Identify the prescribed location of the rear panel on the wall.
NOTE: Make sure that the wall surface on which the cabinet
is mounted is completely flat, so that the front door opens and
closes properly.
2. Place the enclosed drilling template on the prescribed position; align it

using a bubble level at the desired height and secure it to the wall.
Figure 4-4: Preparing the rear panel holes
3. Drill four holes using the four upper holes in the template (the cabinet is 6U
high).
NOTE: Use a drill of max. 8 mm.
DANGER: The operator is responsible for the secure

mounting of the cabinet to the wall, using appropriate
installation materials.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Rear Panel

mounting of the cabinet to the wall, using appropriate
installation materials.
NOTE: Use only the self-tapping screws, supplied with the

cabinet.
To install the rear panel:

1. Place the rear panel on the drilled holes and align it correctly so that it is
flat. Place support beneath as required.
2. Attach the panel to the wall and fasten it with four screws.
Figure 4-5: Installing the rear panel

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the Support Rails

The rear panel has four holes for attaching support rails.
To attach the support rails:

1. Identify the four holes in the rear panel for the support rails (see the
following figure).
Figure 4-6: Installing the support rails
2. Attach a support rail to the rear panel and fasten it with a hex screw using
an appropriate hex wrench.
3. Repeat Step 2 for the other three support rails.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the 19" Vertical Extrusions

Two 19" vertical extrusions are attached to the support rails. The extrusions are
used for the installation of equipment and accessories.
To install the 19" vertical extrusions:

1. Place the extrusion at a distance of 104 mm (approx.) from the support rail
edge.
Figure 4-7: Installing the 19" vertical extrusions
2. Attach the extrusion to the upper and lower support rails with two hex
screws.
3. Fasten the extrusion with the screws using a hex wrench.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the second extrusion.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the C-Rail

A C-Rail (so called because of its C shape) is attached to the upper side of the
rear panel. The C-Rail helps support various cabling accessories.
To install the C-Rail:

1. Identify the two holes for mounting the C-Rail on the rear panel.
2. Place the C-Rail on the rear panel. Insert a flat washer and a hex screw in
the appropriate hole and fasten the C-Rail.
Figure 4-8: Installing the C-Rail
3. Repeat Step 2 for the second hole of the C-Rail.

Maintenance Manual
Installing Cabling Accessories

Several accessories are installed inside the cabinet to facilitate cable and fiber
routing and to ground it.
The cabling accessories installed in the cabinet include:
 Cable guides
 Cable clamping bars
 Fiber optic protective tube
 Grounding cables
The following figure shows the cabling accessories installed in the cabinet.
Figure 4-9: Accessories installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Cable Guides

Cable guides are installed on both sides of the vertical extrusions. The cable
guides help route cables neatly in the cabinet.
Before you start:

Identify the cable guide with its components according to the following figure;
the cable guide has an installation bracket attached.
Figure 4-10: Cabling accessories

Maintenance Manual
To install the cable guides:

1. Align the cable guide on the side of the extrusion to an approx. height of
178 mm from the lower support rail (see the figure Cabling accessories (on
page 4-11)).
2. Attach the cable guide to the vertical extrusion with two screws, flat
washers, sprig washers and nuts, in the order shown in the figure Cabling
accessories (on page 4-11).
3. Fasten the cable guide to the extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the second cable guide.
Attaching the Cable Clamping Bars

Two cable clamping bars are attached to the C-Rail. They help route cables
neatly in the cabinet.
To attach the cable clamping bars:

1. Identify the cable clamping bar according to the figure Installing
accessories (on page 4-11).
2. Attach the clamping bar on the left side of the C-Rail by snapping it on the
rail.
3. Attach the second clamping bar on the right side of the C-Rail.
Attaching the Fiber Guide Tube

The fiber guide tube facilitates fiber routing in the cabinet. It is attached to the
right vertical extrusion, the right cable guide, and the right clamping bar.
To attach the fiber guide tube:

1. Identify the fiber guide tube attachment points according to the figure
Accessories installation (on page 4-10).
2. Attach one end of the fiber guide tube with a cable tie to the right extrusion
at a height of approx. 90 mm from the right lower support rail (see the
figure Accessories installation (on page 4-10)).
3. Shape the tube as shown in the figure Cabling accessories (on page 4-11),
and attach it to the right cable guide (near the rear panel) with a cable tie.
4. Attach the other end of the tube to the right clamping bar with a cable tie.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Grounding Cables

Five grounding cables must be installed in the wall-mounted cabinet. The
cables are attached on one end to the support rails as described in the following
procedure. The other end of the cables is connected to the cabinet covers and
door during their installation as described in Installing the wall-mounted
cabinet covers and door (on page 4-33).
To install grounding cables:

1. Identify the attachment points of the five grounding cables according to the
figure Cabling accessories (on page 4-11).
2. Connect the round terminal lug of a grounding cable to the left lower
support rail outer hole (near the rear panel) with a hex self-tapping screw;
fasten the cable to the support rail using a hex wrench.
3. Repeat Step 2 to connect four more grounding cables to the following
points:
 Left lower support rail inner hole, near the rear panel.
 Left upper support rail inner hole, near the rear panel.
 Right lower support rail outer hole, near the rear panel.
 Right upper support rail inner hole, near the front.

Maintenance Manual
DDF 21 E1s Unit

The DDF unit supports connection of up to 21 E1 lines. The terminal blocks
connect the equipment side and the customer's E1 interfaces. The unit is 1U
high and can be installed in ETSI or 19" racks, using reversible brackets.
The DDF is equipped with five connection blocks, each supporting connection
of five full E1 lines (transmit and receive). The block can also be wired to serve
only transmit or receive lines (total ten lines).
The rear side of the DDF tray includes a cable tie comb that facilitates cable
wiring. In addition, several cable retainers on the DDF tray help keep wire
routing and connection neat.
The connection blocks are attached to bushings located in front of the DDF
tray.
A general view of the DDF unit is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-11: DDF general view

Maintenance Manual
Assembling the DDF

The DDF comes dismantled and must be assembled in the field. The
assembling of the DDF includes the following steps:
 Installing the reversible mounting brackets
 Attaching the connection blocks
The following sections describe the assembling of the DDF.
Installing the Mounting Brackets

The DDF has reversible brackets that by default are assembled for 19" rack
installation. If your installation is in a 19" rack, skip this procedure.
To attach the brackets for ETSI installation:

1. Unscrew the six M2.5 x 6 screws (three on each side) attaching the brackets
to the DDF tray. Keep the screws for the next steps.
Figure 4-12: Installing the brackets for ETSI installation
2. Rotate the bracket to the ETSI position; in this position the longer part of
the bracket is attached to the tray.
3. Use three M2.5 x 6 screws removed in Step 1 to attach the bracket to the
DDF tray.
4. Fasten the bracket to the DDF.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 for the second bracket.

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the Connection Blocks

Five connection blocks are attached to the DDF tray. Two blocks are attached
to each bushing pair except for the leftmost pair, to which one block is
attached.
Each block is equipped with a labeling cover that protects the contacts and
helps identify the wire connections for maintenance and repair purposes.
To attach the connection blocks:

1. Place the block in front of the corresponding DDF bushing pair as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 4-13: Attaching the connection blocks
2. Push the block on the bushings to snap it on.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to attach the other four connection blocks.

Maintenance Manual
Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF

The DDF terminal blocks connect the wires from the equipment and the wires
from the customer interfaces. The E1 cables from the equipment are routed to
the rear part of the DDF and passed to the connection blocks. The cables from
the customer E1 interfaces are routed to the sides of the DDF and connect to
the corresponding blocks.
The following sections describe the connection of the equipment and the
customer lines to the DDF.
Connecting Equipment Cables

The cables from the equipment are routed to the rear of the DDF tray. The tray
has a cable support comb to facilitate cable routing.
To connect an equipment E1 cable:

1. Route the E1 cable from the equipment to the rear part of the DDF.
2. Remove the outer cable jacket, as required, to expose the wire pairs.
3. Use cable ties as needed to attach the cable edge to the cable holder comb.
4. Route the wire pairs through the plastic frame (at the rear of the block).
5. Connect each pair to the corresponding block contacts according to the
wiring diagram.
Connecting the Customer Cables

The cables from the customer interfaces are routed to the sides of the DDF tray.
The tray has cable retainers to help route customer cables neatly.
To connect a customer E1 cable:

1. Route the E1 cable from the customer's facility to the left or right side of
the DDF tray according to the position of the corresponding block.
2. Remove the outer cable jacket, as required, to expose the wire pairs.
3. Use cable ties as required to attach the cable edge to the cable retainers.
4. Route the wire pairs through the plastic frame (at the rear of the block).
5. Connect each pair to the corresponding block contacts according to the
wiring diagram.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B and Three

DDFs
In this configuration the BG-30B and three DDF units are installed in the
cabinet.
The installation includes:
 Installing clip nuts
 Installing the BG-30B
 Installing three DDFs
Refer to the following figure for the installation of the BG-30B and the three
DDFs in the wall-mounted cabinet.
Figure 4-14: Installing a BG shelf and three DDFs

Maintenance Manual
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG and DDFs

Sixteen clip nuts, eight on each side, are attached to the two vertical extrusions
to support the BG-30B and DDFs.
To install the clip nuts:

1. Identify the locations of the clip nuts according to the following figure: the
numbers refer to the distance in mm of the clip nuts from the lowest hole (0
mm).
Figure 4-15: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG and three DDFs)
2. Place a clip nut in the required place at the rear side of the hole in the right
vertical extrusion, and push to snap it in.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other seven clip nuts on the right vertical
extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to install eight clip nuts on the left vertical extrusion.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B Shelf

The BG-30B shelf is installed at the bottom of the cabinet.
To install the BG-30B shelf:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-30B in the cabinet according to
the figure Installing a BG shelf and three DDFs (on page 4-18).
pins to hold it temporarily in place.
3. Fasten the shelf to the vertical extrusion with four M6 screws and flat
washers.
Installing the DDFs

The DDFs are installed above the BG-30B in the cabinet.
To install the DDFs:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the cabinet according to the
figure Installing a BG shelf and three DDFs (on page 4-18).
2. Place the DDF in the prescribed position, and then fasten it to the vertical
extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other two DDFs.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B, Two

DDFs, and an AC CONV Unit
In this configuration, the BG-30B, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit are
installed in the cabinet.
The installation includes:
 Installing clip nuts
 Installing the BG-30B
 Installing two DDFs
 Installing the AC CONV unit
Refer to the following figure for the installation of the BG-30B, DDFs, and the
AC CONV unit in the wall-mounted cabinet.
Figure 4-16: Installing a BG shelf, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit

Maintenance Manual
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG, DDFs, and AC

CONV unit
Sixteen clip nuts, eight on each side, are attached to the two vertical extrusions
to support the BG-30B, DDFs, and AC CONV unit installation.
To install the clip nuts:

1. Identify the locations of the clip nuts according to the following figure. The
numbers refer to the distance in mm of the clip nuts from the lowest hole (0
mm).
Figure 4-17: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG, two DDFs, AC CONV unit)
2. Place a clip nut in the required place at the rear side of the hole in the right
vertical extrusion, and push it to snap in.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other seven clip nuts on the right vertical
extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to install eight clip nuts on the left vertical extrusion.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B shelf

The BG-30B shelf is installed at the bottom of the cabinet.
To install the BG-30B shelf:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-30B in the cabinet according to
the figure Installing a BG shelf, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit (on
page 4-21).
pins to hold it temporarily in place.
3. Fasten the shelf to the vertical extrusion with four M6 screws and flat
washers.
Installing DDFs
The DDFs are installed above the BG-30B in the cabinet.
To install the DDFs:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the cabinet according to the
figure Installing a BG shelf, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit (on page 4-
21).
2. Place the DDF in the prescribed position and fasten it to the vertical
extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second DDF.
Installing the AC CONV Unit

The AC CONV unit is installed in the upper position of the wall-mounted
cabinet.
To install the AC CONV unit:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC CONV unit in the cabinet
according to the figure Installing a BG shelf, two DDFs, and an AC CONV
unit (on page 4-21).
2. Place the AC CONV unit in the prescribed position and fasten it to the
vertical extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Cabinet Grounding

The cabinet must be connected to the site grounding bar with a ground cable
according to ETSI recommendations.
The cabinet is supplied with a main grounding bolt welded to it. The grounding
stud is identified on the cabinet by the ground symbol label.
The bolt must be free of paint. The cabinet grounding bolt must be connected
to the site grounding bar by a grounding cable with a cross section of the same
size as the power feeding cable or thicker, as short as possible, in compliance
with UL/ETSI recommendations. ECI Telecom recommends using a grounding
cable of 12 AWG to 16 AWG. The cable must be made of copper strands with
a green/yellow jacket and terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
To ground the cabinet:

1. Unscrew the nut and spring washer from the grounding bolt (M8 size) in
the cabinet. The grounding bolt is marked L2 as shown in the figure
Connecting grounding cables (on page 4-35).
2. Connect the grounding cable from the site grounding, terminated with an
M8 lug to the grounding bolt.
3. Attach the grounding cable with the nut and spring washer removed in Step
1, and fasten the cable to the bolt.
Routing and Connecting Cables

and Fibers in the Cabinet
cables must be routed in the space beneath the BG-30B shelf and the cabinet
floor. All optical fibers are routed through the flexible tube attached to the right
side of the cabinet. The side to which the cables are passed is determined by the
side of the connectors on the BG-30B front panel. For instance, power
connectors are on the left side of the BG-30B, so the power cables are routed
on the left side beneath the shelf. The cables are then attached to the cable
guide on the left side of the cabinet with cable ties.
When routing the various types of cables, several principles must be observed
to avoid electromagnetic and RF interference:
 Traffic cables must not be routed in the same route as power cables.
 Optical fibers must always be routed through the special flexible tube only.

Maintenance Manual
The following sections provide detailed descriptions of cable and fiber

connection and routing.
Refer to the following figure for routing and connecting cables and fibers in the
wall-mounted cabinet.
Figure 4-18: Wall-mounted cabinet cabling

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
BG-30B shelf.
To connect power cables:
NOTE: To facilitate power cable routing, it is recommended

to start from the BG-30B shelf towards the power source.
1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the power connector
on the BG-30B, and fasten it with its two screws.
2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable, and thread it
through the space beneath the shelf.
Figure 4-19: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing front view
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the
corresponding connector on the shelf.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the left cable guide of the cabinet.

Maintenance Manual
5. Route the cable near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
Figure 4-20: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing left side view
7. Route the cables through the opening in the top cover.

8. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the cabinet
installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the
power source.

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cable is connected to the corresponding connector on the BG-30B or
ICP_MCP30 (if used).
To connect the alarm cable:

1. Connect the connector of the alarm cable, in accordance with the frame
MCP30 (if an ICP_MCP30 is not installed) or Alarms connector on the
front panel of the ICP_MCP30.
2. Secure the cable connector to the MCP30 or ICP_MCP30 connector with
cm to 44 N cm.
3. Bend the cable and route it above the BG-30B and through to the left side
cable guide.
4. Route the cable near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable holder and to the
cable clamp.
6. Route the cables through the opening in the top cover.
7. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable to the customer's facility in
accordance with the cabinet installation plan and the cable tags.

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Optical Fibers

All optical fibers in the BG-30B shelf are connected to the LC connectors on
the SFP/XFP transceivers. Optical fibers must be routed through the flexible
tube attached to the right side of the cabinet.
Before you start:

characteristics.
To connect an optical fiber to a BG-30B module/card:

1. Insert the end of the fiber into the upper end of the flexible tube and pull it
at the lower end, near the BG-30B.
2. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated
module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
3. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
4. Remove the cover from the module/card connector and connect the fiber
connector to it.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for all optical fibers to be connected to BG-30B
modules/cards.

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Electrical Traffic

Cables
Multipair cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on E1 modules installed in the BG-30B.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the E1 module is terminated with an
appropriate male connector.
To connect multipair cables:

1. Bring the cable connector against the appropriate slot and connect the cable
connector to the corresponding module.
2. Secure the cable connector to the module connector with the two cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually; if the screws cannot be
reached with your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver.
3. Bend the cables and thread them through the left side cable guide of the
cabinet.
4. Route the cables near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
NOTE: The cables route described above assumes that the E1

module is installed on the left side in the BG-30B. In case the
module is installed on the right side, the same steps of the
procedure should be performed, but on the cabinet's right
side.
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
6. Use a cabling diagram of the cabinet (or site) to associate module
connectors with the appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length
if necessary.
7. If the DDF is installed in the frame, refer to Wiring the E1 Cables to the
DDF (on page 4-17) for connecting the E1 cables to the DDF wiring
blocks.

Maintenance Manual

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
E3/DS-3 and electrical STM-1 modules.
As part of site preparations, suitable cables must be routed from the relevant
High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended cabinet location and connected to the
coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors. Sufficient length should be
available to permit routing the cables to the appropriate level in the cabinet.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to E3/DS-3 or STM-1

modules:
1. Pull each coaxial cable to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
2. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
connector on the module.
3. Based on the cabinet (or site) cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in
groups according to the designated module and route them along the left
side of the cabinet.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the left side cable guide of the
cabinet.
5. Route the cables near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
NOTE: The cables route described above assumes that the

E3/DS-3 or electrical STM-1 module is installed on the left
side of the BG-30B. If the module is installed on the right
side, the same procedure steps must be performed, but on the
cabinet's right side.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
7. Cut excess cable length if necessary.

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3/T4 connector of the BG-30B shelf.
To connect a timing cable to the BG-30B shelf:

1. Route the timing cables along the side of the cabinet.
2. Pull the cable down to the level of the T3/T4 connector and bend it until the
cable connector is positioned against the timing connector.
3. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the cabinet installation
plan and the cable tags to connector T3/T4 on the shelf.
4. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.
5. Bend the cable and thread it through the right side cable guide of the
cabinet.
6. Route the cables near the right cable clamp on the C-rail.
7. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cabinet cable guide and
cable clamp.
Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated
MNG on the BG-30B shelf. Each cable is terminated with an RJ-45 plug.
To connect management cables to the BG-30B shelf:

1. Bring the cable plug against the appropriate connector on the BG-30B.
2. Connect the management station cable to the MNG connector of the shelf
in accordance with the frame installation plan and the cable tags.
3. Thread the cable through the space above the BG-30B and the left side of
the cabinet.
4. Bend the cable and thread it through the left side cable guide of the cabinet.
5. Route the cables near the right cable clamp on the C-rail.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cabinet cable guide and
cable clamp.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Wall-Mounted

Cabinet Covers and Door
After completing the equipment installation and cabling, the cabinet is ready
for the covers and the door to be installed. After each cover is installed, a
grounding cable is attached to it.
Installing the Top and Bottom Covers

Follow these steps to install the bottom covers.
To install the bottom cover:

1. Slide the bottom cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on the
cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (marked F1 in the
following figure).
Figure 4-21: Installing top and bottom covers

Maintenance Manual
2. Fasten the bottom cover to the lower support rails with four self-tapping
screws (F2) (two on each side).
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the bottom cover (see
the following figure).
Figure 4-22: Connecting grounding cables
To install the top cover:

1. Slide the top cover while inserting the two protrusions on the cover into the
opposite housing on the rear panel (see the figure Installing top and bottom
covers (on page 4-33)).
2. Fasten the top cover to the upper support rails with four self-tapping screws
(F2) (two on each side).
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the top cover.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Side Covers

Follow these steps to install the side covers.
To install the right side cover:

1. Slide the right side cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on
the cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (marked J1 in the
following figure).
Figure 4-23: Installing side covers
2. Fasten the right side cover to the top and bottom covers with two Phillips
screws (J2), one on each side.
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the right side cover
(see the following figure).
Figure 4-24: Connecting grounding cables

Maintenance Manual
To install the left side cover:

1. Slide the left side cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on
the cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (see the figure
Installing side covers (on page 4-35)).
2. Fasten the left side cover to the top and bottom covers with two Phillips
screws (J2), one on each side.
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the left side cover.
Installing the Front Door

Follow these steps to install the front door.
To install the front door:

1. Slide the door upper hinge into the corresponding slot in the top cover (see
the following figure).
Figure 4-25: Installing the front door
2. Align the door lower hinge into the corresponding slot in the bottom cover.
3. Adjust the door to open and close freely.
4. Fasten the upper and lower hex screws with a hex wrench.

Maintenance Manual
5. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the door (see the
following figure).
Figure 4-26: Connecting the door grounding cable
Wall-Mounted Frame
The wall-mounted frame is another option for installing the BG-30B and
accessories in SOHO.
The wall-mounted frame is 300 mm high, 600 mm wide, and 350 mm deep
with a front transparent protection cover. The cover protects the BG-30B traffic
and fiber cables against unintended disconnection or bending.

Maintenance Manual

Frame
The wall-mounted frame installation includes the following steps:
 Installing the cable supports
 Installing the fiber guide tube
 Preparing the frame installation holes
 Installing the frame
Installing Cable Supports

Four cable supports are installed in the wall-mounted frame, two on each side.
To facilitate the installation, it is preferred to install the cable supports in the
frame before attaching the frame to the wall.
To install the cable supports in the frame:

1. Identify the cable supports according to the following figure; use this figure
as reference in the following steps.

Maintenance Manual
Figure 4-27: Wall-mounted frame installation
The lower cable support is attached to the frame side in holes 5 and 8 from
the bottom as shown in the figure above.
2. Attach the lower cable support to the frame with four M3 Phill. screws,
spring washers, and flat washers.
3. Fasten the cable support to the frame.
The upper cable support is attached to the frame side in holes 5 and 8 from
the top as shown in the figure above.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for attaching the upper cable support to the frame.
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for installing two cable supports on the other side of the
frame.

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the Fiber Guide Tube

The fiber guide tube facilitates fiber routing in the frame. It is attached to the
right side of the frame and fastened to the cable supports.
To attach the fiber guide tube:

1. Identify the fiber guide tube attachment points according to the following
figure.
Figure 4-28: Attaching the fiber guide tube
2. Attach one end of the fiber guide tube with a cable tie to the lower cable
support near the front of the frame.
3. Shape the tube as shown in the figure, and attach it to the lower cable
support (near the rear of the frame) with a cable tie.
4. Attach the tube to the upper cable support (near the rear of the frame) with
a cable tie.

Maintenance Manual
Preparing Installation Holes

The wall-mounted frame needs four installation holes.
To prepare the installation holes:

1. Place the wall-mounted frame on the prescribed location on the wall. Make
sure that the wall surface is flat and even.
2. Use the frame as a template and mark the required holes through the frame.
You can use the dimensions (in mm) in the following figure as reference.
Figure 4-29: Holes location for wall-mounted frame
3. Drill four holes in the wall according to the markings.
Attaching the Wall-Mounted Frame

mounting of the frame to the wall, using appropriate
installation practice and materials.
To attach the wall-mounted frame:

1. Place the frame on the drilled holes and align it flat. Place support beneath
as required.
2. Attach the frame to the wall and fasten it with four screws.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B and

Accessories in the Wall-Mounted
Frame
ECI Telecom offers five configurations for installing the BG-30B and various
accessories in the wall-mounted frame. You can select the most suitable
configuration according to your application.
The configurations are:
 BG-30B and three DDFs (option 1)
 BG-30B, a DDF, and a RAP-BG (option 2)
 BG-30B, a DDF, and an ICP_MCP30 (option 3)
 BG-30B, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV unit (option 4)
 BG-30B and a DDF (option 5)

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B and Three DDFs

(Option 1)
In this configuration, the BG-30B and three DDFs are installed in the
wall-mounted frame.
Refer to the following figure for the installation of the equipment described in
this section.
Figure 4-30: Installing a BG and three DDFs
To install the BG-30B:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-30B in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the BG-30B to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the BG-30B to the frame.

Maintenance Manual
To install the three DDFs:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the lower DDF in the wall-mounted
frame.
2. Attach the DDF to the frame using four M6 Phill. screws and flat washers.
3. Fasten the DDF to the frame.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for installing the other two DDFs.
Installing the BG-30B, a DDF, and a RAP-BG

(Option 2)
In this configuration, the BG-30B, a DDF, and a RAP-BG are installed in the
wall-mounted frame.
this section.
Figure 4-31: Installing a BG, a DDF, and a RAP-BG

Maintenance Manual

washers.
To install the DDF:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the DDF to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat washers.

1. Identify the prescribed position of the RAP-BG in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the RAP-BG to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the RAP-BG to the frame.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B, an ICP_MCP30, and a

DDF (Option 3)
In this configuration the BG-30B, an ICP_MCP30, and a DDF are installed in
the wall-mounted frame.
this section.
Figure 4-32: Installing an BG, a ICP_MCP30, and a DDF

washers.

Maintenance Manual
To install the ICP_MCP30:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP_MCP30 in the wall-mounted
frame.
2. Attach the ICP_MCP30 to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the ICP_MCP30 to the frame.
To install the DDF:


Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B, a DDF, and an AC/DC

CONV (Option 4)
In this configuration, the BG-30B, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV are installed
in the wall-mounted frame.
this section.
Figure 4-33: Installing a BG, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV

washers.

Maintenance Manual
To install the DDF:

To install the AC/DC CONV:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC/DC CONV in the wall-mounted
frame.
2. Attach the AC/DC CONV to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the AC/DC CONV to the frame.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-30B and a DDF (Option 5)

In this configuration, the BG-30B and a DDF are installed in the wall-mounted
frame.
Refer to the following figure for the installation of the equipment described
later on in this section.
Figure 4-34: Installing a BG and a DDF

washers.

Maintenance Manual
To install the DDF:


Frame Front Cover
The transparent cover protects the BG-30B traffic and fiber cables against
unintended disconnection or bending. The cover is attached to four holders on
the frame's front side.
The installation of the cover includes the following steps:
 Installing the cover holders
 Attaching the transparent cover

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Cover Holders

Four holders are installed in front of the wall-mounted frame to which the front
cover is attached.
To install the cover holders:

1. Identify the cover holder positions on the frame according to the following
figure.
Figure 4-35: Installing the front cover
2. Insert a holder into the left upper groove on the frame and attach it with an
M4 Phill. screw, spring washer, and flat washer.
3. Fasten the holder to the frame.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to attach a holder to the left lower side of the frame.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to install two holders on the right side of the frame.

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the Transparent Protection Cover

The transparent protection cover protects the cables and fibers against
unintended disconnection. The protection cover is attached to four supports
installed in front of the frame.
NOTE: The protection cover is attached in place only after all

cabling functions of the BG-30B and the other equipment,
described in Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the
Frame (on page 4-54), have been completed.
To attach the protection cover:

1. Identify the cover and the four latch pins according to the figure Installing
the front cover (on page 4-52).
2. Insert a latch pin into each corner hole in the cover.
3. Attach the cover to the holders by inserting the pins into the corresponding
holes in the holders.
4. Push the pin latches into the holders to lock them in place.
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame

Grounding
The frame must be connected to the site grounding bar with a grounding cable
according to ETSI recommendations.
The frame is supplied with a main grounding bolt welded to it on the right
installation bracket. The grounding stud is identified on the frame by the
ground symbol label.
The bolt must be free of paint. The frame grounding bolt must be connected to
the site grounding bar by a grounding cable with a cross section of the same
size as the power feeding cable or thicker, as short as possible, in compliance
with UL/ETSI recommendations. ECI Telecom recommends using a grounding
cable of 12 AWG to 16 AWG. The cable must be made of copper strands with
a green/yellow jacket and terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
To ground the wall-mounted frame:

1. Unscrew the nut and spring washer from the grounding bolt (M6 size) in
the frame. The grounding bolt is shown in the figure Routing and
connecting cable and fibers in the wall-mounted frame (on page 4-54).
2. Connect the grounding cable from the site grounding, terminated with an
M6 lug, to the grounding bolt.
3. Attach the grounding cable with the nut and spring washer removed in Step
1, and fasten the cable to the bolt.

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Cables

and Fibers in the Frame
cables are routed in the space beneath the BG-30B shelf and the frame floor.
All optical fibers should be routed through the flexible tube attached to the
right side of the wall-mounted frame. The side to which the cables are passed is
determined by the side of the connectors on the BG-30B front panel. For
instance, power connectors are on the left side of the BG-30B, so power cables
are routed on the left side beneath the shelf. The cables are then attached to the
cable supports on the left side of the frame, using cable ties.
When routing the various types of cables, several principles must be observed
to avoid electromagnetic and RF interference:
 Traffic cables must not be routed in the same route as power cables.
 Optical fibers must be routed through the special flexible tube only.
The following sections provide detailed descriptions of cable and fiber
connection and routing.
Refer to the following figure for routing and connecting cables and fibers in the
wall-mounted frame.
Figure 4-36: Routing and connecting cables and fibers in the wall-mounted frame

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
BG-30B shelf.
To connect a power cable:
NOTE: To facilitate power cables routing, it is recommended

to start from the BG-30B shelf towards the power source.
1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the power connector
of the BG-30B and fasten it with its two screws.
2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable and thread it
through the space between the shelf and the frame.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the
corresponding connector on the shelf.
4. Bend the cables and route them adjacent to the left side cable supports. Pull
the cables until the cable connectors are positioned against the appropriate
connectors on the power source. See the following figure for reference.
Figure 4-37: Wall-mounted frame cable routing - left side view
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable supports.
6. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the frame
installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the
power source.

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cable is connected to the corresponding connector on the BG-30B or
ICP_MCP30 (if used).
To connect the alarm cable:

1. Connect the connector of the alarm cable, in accordance with the frame
MCP30 (if an ICP_MCP30 is not installed) or Alarms connector on the
front panel of the ICP_MCP30.
2. Secure the cable connector to the MCP30 or ICP_MCP30 connector with
cm to 44 N cm.
3. Bend the cable and route it above the BG-30B and adjacent to the left side
cable supports.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable supports.
5. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable in accordance with the frame
installation plan and the cable tags to the customer's facility.

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Optical Fibers

All optical fibers in the BG-30B shelf are connected to the LC connectors on
the SFP/XFP transceivers.
Before you start:

characteristics.
To connect an optical fiber to a BG-30B module/card:

1. Insert the end of the fiber into the upper end of the flexible tube and pull it
at the lower end, near the BG-30B.
2. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated
module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
3. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
4. Remove the cover from the module/card connector, and connect the fiber
connector to it.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for all optical fibers to be connected to BG-30B
modules/cards.

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Electrical Traffic

Cables
Multipair cables are used to connect the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on the BG-30B or on E1 modules installed in it.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the BG-30B or to the E1 module is
terminated with an appropriate male connector.
To connect multipair cables:

1. Bring the cable connector against the appropriate slot and connect the cable
connector to the corresponding module.
2. Secure the connector to the module connector with the two cable connector
screws. Tighten the screws manually. If the screws cannot be reached with
your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the space above the BG-30B and the
left side of the frame. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the
frame cable supports. See the figure Wall-mounted frame cable routing -
left side view (on page 4-55) for reference.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the frame (or site) to associate module connectors
with the appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length if
necessary.
5. If a DDF is installed in the frame, refer to Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF
(on page 4-17) for connecting the E1 cables to the DDF wiring blocks.

Maintenance Manual

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
E3/DS-3 and electrical STM-1 modules.
As part of site preparations, suitable cables must be routed from the relevant
High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended frame location and connected to the
coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors. Sufficient length should be
available to permit routing the cables to the appropriate level in the frame.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to E3/DS-3 or STM-1

modules:
1. Pull each coaxial cable to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
2. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
electrical connector on the module.
3. Based on the frame (or site) cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in
groups according to the designated module, and route them along the left
side of the frame.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the space above the BG-30B and
the left side of the frame. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to
the frame cable supports. See the figure Wall-mounted frame cable routing
- left side view (on page 4-55) for reference.
5. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3/T4 connectors of the BG-30B.
To connect a timing cable to the BG-30B shelf:

1. Route the timing cable along the side of the frame. Fasten the cable to the
cable supports, using cable ties.
2. Pull the cable down to the level of the T3/T4 connectors and bend it until
the cable connector is positioned against the timing connector.
3. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the frame installation
plan and the cable tags to connector T3/T4 on the shelf.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the frame cable supports.

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated
MNG on the BG-30B shelf. Each cable is terminated in an RJ-45 plug.
To connect management cables to the BG-30B shelf:

1. Bring the cable plug against the appropriate connector on the BG-30B.
2. Connect the management station cable to the MNG connector of the shelf
in accordance with the frame installation plan and the cable tags.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the space above the BG-30B and the
left side of the frame.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the frame cable supports.

5
Commissioning Tests
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 5-1
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 5-1
Site Commissioning Tests ............................................................................... 5-2
SDH Commissioning Tests ............................................................................. 5-6
Data Network Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-13
Overview
After a new network has been installed and configured, commissioning tests
are performed to confirm that the installation is successful and that the network
is operating in accordance with the design specifications.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:
 PDH transmission analyzer for testing PDH transmission performance
 SDH transmission analyzer for testing SDH transmission performance
 Data transmission test equipment for testing FE transmission performance
 Optical Power Meter (OPM)
 Set of optical attenuators with various values
 Variable optical attenuator
 FC-to-LC adapters
 LC/FC optical patch cords
 Multimeter

Commissioning Tests BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers and

therefore no specific test equipment models are listed. You can use any
equipment that meets the applicable international standards and has satisfactory
measurement accuracy over the range of operating parameters and
environmental conditions that apply to the specific network. If necessary,
contact ECI Telecom’s Field Engineering Department for specific
recommendations.
Site Commissioning Tests

Site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of BG-30 NEs. Perform
the following procedures on each NE at each site:
 Verify the cards and modules installed in each shelf.
 Perform a visual inspection and mechanical checks.
 Measure optical levels (see reference data in the BroadGate Product Line
General Description).
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in

Each Shelf
This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have
been installed in each site, and to record their options, revisions, boot version,
and serial numbers.
The following table provides a typical form for recording the cards and
modules installed in a BG-30 shelf.
Table 5-1: Card and module inventory
Card/Module type Slot Option Revision Boot Serial

version number
MCP30 MS
XIO30_1 XS A

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Commissioning Tests
Maintenance Manual
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks

The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing
and connection of cables, and other tasks related to equipment installation, as
follows:
 Equipment installation provides the criteria for proper equipment
installation.
 The site cabling diagram provides the criteria for proper cabling routing.
After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 through 18 in the
following table), power on the BG-30B shelf to perform an additional set of
acceptance tests (items 15 through 19 in the following table). These tests check
the functions needed for continuing the execution of the network
commissioning tests. Consult the BroadGate Product Line General Description
and the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual for a description of the
various card indicators and their functions.
The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual
inspection and mechanical check.
Table 5-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks
No. Description of inspection/check Results

1 Check mechanical mounting of the rack.
2 Check the BG-30B/BG-30E installation; make sure that the rail
stiffeners are properly installed.
3 Check the ODF and FST installation and fiber connection (if
applicable).
4 Check the DDF installation and relevant cable connections (if
applicable).
5 Check ICP_MCP30 installation and relevant cable connections
(if applicable).
6 Check the grounding cable connections.
7 Check the DC power cable connections (main fuse to RAP,
RAP fuse to BG-30B/BG-30E shelf).
8 Check the network manager station installation (if applicable).
9 Check the installation of modules and cards.
10 Check the connection of relevant cables or fibers for all cards
installed.
11 Provide DC supply voltage via the INF_30B or
INF_30BH/INF_30E on slot PSA to the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).
12 Provide DC supply voltage via the INF_30B or
INF_30BH/INF_30E on slot PSB to the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).

Maintenance Manual
No. Description of inspection/check Results

13 Power on the shelf.
14 Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources by
disconnecting one source at a time.
15 Check the communication between the BG-30B shelf and the
LCT-BGF via the MNG Ethernet interface on the MCP30.
16 Check the proper operation of all fans.
17 Check LED operation using the LED TEST option in the
LCT-BGF.
18 Check slot assignment for all relevant cards and modules.
19 Check that there are no abnormal alarms.
Measuring Optical Levels

These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports.
Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels within
the limits specified in the BroadGate Product Line System Specifications must
be achieved for each optical component.
Perform these measurements using an OPM configured according to the
wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable measurement, do not connect
the OPM directly to a port but use a two-meter fiber. When measuring high
optical power levels, use attenuators to ensure that the power does not exceed
the maximum OPM input level.
The following table provides a typical data form for recording the results of the
optical level measurements.
Table 5-3: Measured optical levels
Slot Module type Port Wavelength Optical Receive level

transmit level (dBm)
(dBm)

Maintenance Manual
The measured power levels are evaluated as follows:

 The measured power must be within the range of minimum and maximum
levels specified in the BroadGate Product Line General Description for the
transceiver plug-in type installed on the corresponding port.
 The measured power must be within the expected range according to the
optical network plan.
It is usually sufficient to measure the optical levels only at the receive ports. A
good port-receive level indicates that the components in the optical path up to
that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result is not
satisfactory, perform additional measurements at the transmit port in the remote
site.
Shelf Power-On Test Procedure

Follow the procedure below to test the BG-30 power-on process.
To power on the NE:

1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the shelf.
2. After 10 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker off.
3. After 30 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker on.
The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without
user intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.

Maintenance Manual
SDH Commissioning Tests

These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with
the system specifications.
Test Equipment Setup

The SDH tests are performed using a PDH analyzer, OPM, and variable
attenuators. Configure the OPM according to the measured wavelength.
The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following
sections.
Table 5-4: 2 Mbps tests
Framing Unframed
Coding HDB3
Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate 2 Mbps
Timing Internal clock
Inject error Code error
Framing Unframed
Coding HDB3
Signal rate 34 Mbps
Framing Unframed
Coding B3ZS
Signal rate 45 Mbps

Maintenance Manual
For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type
being tested.
Table 5-7: SDH tests
Signal rate STM-1, STM-4

Mapping Any mapping (preferably bulk)
Signal rate 155.520 Mbps, 622.080 Mbps
Timing Received clock
Inject error BIP error
Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection Test

This test verifies that NEs recognize alarms and send an alarm notification to
the management system for viewing.
To perform a LOS detection test:

1. Create NEs and links through the management system.
2. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the modules. A LOS alarm at
the SPI level of this module port appears, together with other alarms
generated by the disconnection.
Network Timing Synchronization Test

This test checks that the BG-30 NEs synchronize properly and switch to the
next priority clock source when a failure occurs.
To perform network timing synchronization test:

1. Define one NE as the (internal) timing source to which all other NEs are
synchronized. This test can be done with an external timing source, if
requested.
2. Define several priorities for the timing source.
3. Disconnect the Rx fiber connected to the NE defined as the main timing
source.
If the NE has two or more timing sources, it synchronizes to the second priority
source, and an alarm is generated for the missing main timing source.
If the NE has only one timing source, the NE timing is set as “hold-over” and
an alarm is generated for the main timing source. Another alarm is generated to
indicate that there is no available timing source.

Maintenance Manual
Input Sensitivity Test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the BG-30 optical modules is
according to specifications.
To perform an input sensitivity test:

1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE
(in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant
trail, and set the attenuator to 0 dB.
4. Increase the attenuation gradually until the test equipment displays a burst
of errors.
5. Connect an OPM to the first Rx point after the variable optical attenuator
and measure the total power. The measured optical power level is the input
sensitivity of the module.
6. Verify that the results are in accordance with the BroadGate Product Line
System Specifications.
Equipment Power-On Test

This test verifies that the BG-30 NEs continue operating properly after a power
break, without operator involvement.
To perform an equipment power-on test:

3. Shut off the power to one of the nongateway NEs within the relevant trail.
Errors and an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) alarm appear in the test
equipment. After approximately seven minutes, an “NE disconnected”
alarm appears in the management system current alarm list, and the NE
icon turns gray (indicates no communication).
4. Power on the NE and wait for it to perform the initial download to all
cards/modules in the shelf. This can take five minutes.
5. Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there
are no relevant alarms in the test equipment or at the management station.

Maintenance Manual
Traffic Stability Test

This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards.
To perform traffic stability test:

3. Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the following
table.
4. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management
station. You should achieve an error-free rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps and
1 x 10-12 for all other rates.
Table 5-8: Traffic stability test time intervals
2 Mbps 34/45 Mbps STM-1/VC-3 STM-4/VC-12

14 hours 7 hours 120 minutes 30 minutes
Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test

This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.
To perform a path protection and nonretrieval test:

1. Create one protected trail of any rate between two NEs.
3. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the trail. Short alarm
bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail.
4. Verify that the trail works properly on the protection path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail remains on the protection path
(nonretrieve mode), and there is no alarm in the test equipment.

Maintenance Manual
Severity Assignment Test

This test, which is performed on one BG-30 NE, determines the level of
urgency accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm-handling protocol.
When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and
reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.
To perform a severity assignment test:

1. Disconnect a fiber from one of the optical interfaces. An SPI LOS alarm of
critical severity appears on the management station for the BG-30 and the
MJR LED on the BG-30B panel turns on.
2. Reconnect the fiber. The SPI LOS alarm on the management station clears
and the MJR LED on the BG-30B panel turns off (only if there are no other
alarms on the BG-30 unit).
3. Change the severity of the SPI LOS alarm to minor.
4. Disconnect a fiber from one of the optical interfaces. An SPI LOS alarm of
minor severity appears on the management station for the BG-30 and the
MNR LED on the BG-30B panel turns on (only if there is no critical or
major alarm on the BG-30 unit).
5. Reconnect the fiber. The SPI LOS alarm on the management station clears
and the MNR LED on the BG-30B panel turns off (only if there is no other
alarm on the BG-30 unit).

Maintenance Manual
Transmission Alarm-Handling Test

This test verifies that the BG-30 NEs can recognize an alarm and send an alarm
notification to the management system, and that the management system
displays it properly.
This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.
To perform a transmission alarm-handling test:

2. Connect PDH test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the
other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Disconnect the Tx cable of the test equipment. The management station
reports a LOS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
4. Set the test equipment to transmit an AIS (AIS = on). The management
station reports an AIS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
5. Disconnect the Rx fiber of an optical port. The management station reports
a LOS (SPI-LOS) alarm for the relevant optical port.
If ALS = off, the management station reports a far-end optical port
MS-RDI alarm.
If ALS = on, the management station reports a far-end optical port LOS
alarm.

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance Action Test

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the BG-30 NEs
using the management system.
This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate
RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.
To perform maintenance action test:

2. Connect test equipment to one NE. The PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
3. Perform a near-end loopback at the other trail endpoint. The AIS alarm in
the PDH test equipment clears, and no alarm or error remains on the PDH
test equipment.
4. Using the management station, execute a forced AIS on the PDH port that
connects to the test equipment. The PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
5. Using the management station, execute a forced low-rate RDI (or forced
high-rate RDI or forced MS-RDI) on a BG-30 shelf. Another BG-30 shelf
reports a low-rate RDI (or high-rate RDI or MS-RDI) to the management
station.

Maintenance Manual
Data Network Commissioning

Tests
The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in
accordance with system specifications.
Throughput and Latency Tests

These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network,
and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before
frames are lost.
To perform throughput and latency tests:

1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate between two NEs in the
network.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of
the other NE through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 throughput and latency
measurement.
4. Measure the throughput and latency for frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512,
1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes, and record the results in the appropriate table.
NOTES:
 Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths.
For a single path, the latency is 50% of the measured
value.
 The latency test is dependent on the throughput results.
For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is
4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2 * VC-12 = 4
Mbps).
 Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth (VC-12
= 2.048 Mbps).
Table 5-9: Throughput and latency test results

LAN port and 64 128 256 512 1024 bytes/ 1280 1518 bytes/
speed bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ frame bytes/ frame
frame frame frame frame frame
Throughput
Latency

Maintenance Manual
System Recovery and Reset Tests

These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer
overflow condition or from a power failure.
To perform system recovery and reset tests:

1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate (for example, 10/100
Mbps) between two NEs.
the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Power off one of the NEs and verify packet loss in the test equipment.
5. Turn on the NE, wait five minutes, and verify that the errors in the test
equipment have cleared.
Frame Loss Rate Test

This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is
overloaded.
To perform a frame loss rate test:

1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails between two NEs.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 for frame loss measurements.
Set to 100%.
The frame loss rate in % is defined according to the following formula:
[(input fps) - (output fps)] * 100 / (input fps)
fps = frames per second
For example, for a 100 Mbps test using 5 * VC-12 = 10 Mbps, with input
fps = 148810 and output fps = 14881, the frame loss is:
148810 - 14881 = 133929, which represents 90% loss.
Table 5-10: Frame loss-rate test results

Frame size 64 128 256 512 1024 bytes/ 1280 1518 bytes/
bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ frame bytes/ frame
frame frame frame frame frame
Frame rate
(% MFR) 100%

Maintenance Manual
Stability Test
This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can
function with no errors for a defined period of time.
To perform a stability test:

1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate (for example,
10/100 Mbps) between two NEs.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Set the transmit rate in the test equipment to about 90% of the trail
bandwidth.
5. Run this test for two hours, and verify that no errors appear in the test
equipment.
Alarm-Handling Test
This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent
action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and
to the optical interfaces.
To perform an alarm-handling test:

1. Create two Ethernet trails of any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps) between
two NEs.
3. Disconnect the test equipment to create a signal loss to the data LAN port.
This generates a 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm.

Maintenance Manual

6
Maintenance
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 6-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials ............................................. 6-1
Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 6-2
Onsite Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 6-3
Troubleshooting Power Problems ................................................................... 6-4
Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators ................................................ 6-6
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 6-25
Overview
This chapter provides maintenance procedures for BG-30 equipment.
Personnel involved in maintenance must be thoroughly familiar with safety
issues, as described in Before You Start (on page 2-1).
Required Test Equipment, Tools,

and Materials
For most maintenance activities described in this chapter, only an LCT-BGF
terminal and a multimeter are required. If you need to make measurements, it is
recommended to use equipment of the same type and models used for
commissioning tests. For more information, see Commissioning Tests (on page
5-1). The tools and materials necessary for equipment installation must also be
available during maintenance.

Maintenance BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Preventive Maintenance
The purpose of the preventive maintenance activities is to keep the BG-30
hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any
condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction.
Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the
procedures used in your organization.
Table 6-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks
Item Inspection/Check Intervals*

W M Q
1 Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers. Check X
for correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper support to
avoid stress. Avoid touching fibers during the inspection,
except as required to correct problems.
2 Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection terminals, X
grounding, and so on, and pay special attention to any
signs of corrosion.
3 Check the condition of rack front doors and RFI fingers. X
Clean as necessary with approved cleaning agents.
4 Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air X
conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, and so on) and
their power sources.
5 Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by X
protective covers. Add covers as necessary.
6 Check that cards and modules are securely attached. All X
module fastening screws must be tight (tighten only
manually).
7 Check for proper operation of the fans (no abnormal noise X
and vibrations) in all NEs.
8 Clean all areas around the shelf in the rack and the rack’s X
front door (if applicable), using a vacuum cleaner.
9 Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources X
(main and backup) to the RAP are properly connected.
10 Check that the external alarm cables are properly X
connected to the RAP.
11 Check that there are no alarm indications on the cards and X
modules.
12 Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer X
sounds while the POWER ON pushbutton on the RAP
panel is pressed.

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
Maintenance Manual
Item Inspection/Check Intervals*

W M Q
13 Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when X
performing the LED TEST operation using the LCT-BGF.
Note: LEDs for FE interfaces and LEDs for Laser On
indications are not covered by the LED test operation.
14 Perform a visual check of LED indications. X
15 Check the proper operation of the orderwire (OW) system
(if applicable to the NE).
* Legend: W weekly M monthly Q quarterly
Onsite Troubleshooting
The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the
malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.
Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following
conditions:
 Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.
 Alarm or malfunction detected onsite by maintenance personnel, either as a
result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center
personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance
action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available
on the BG-30 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the BG-30, with SDH data, and with the
LightSoft and EMS-BGF management stations. Refer to the respective user
manual for details on the various capabilities of the management stations, and
for instructions on performing the necessary activities.
The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite
troubleshooting for various trouble categories. For each category, a
troubleshooting table provides instructions for identifying the problem.
To use the troubleshooting table:

1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under
“Symptoms”.
2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under “Corrective actions” in
the order they appear, until the trouble is corrected.

Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Power
Problems
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting power problems
No. Symptoms Probably cause Corrective actions

1 RAP POWER Both main and backup  Check the site power
ON indicator power sources failed distribution system.
off  Check the DC voltage at the
main and backup power
terminals of the RAP.
 If the voltage is not within
the correct range, check
cable connections up to the
DC power distribution panel
and make sure no fuses are
blown.
 Check the voltage supplied
by the main and backup
power sources.
 Check the power
connections to the RAP.
 Check the circuit breakers in
the RAP and replace if
necessary.
Equipment problem  Check the voltage at the
BG-30B, BG-30E and
BG-OW end of each power
cable. Replace the cable or
repair the RAP if there is no
voltage present.
 Check and reconnect cables
to the equipment, one by
one. If the circuit breaker
trips again when connecting
a specific unit, replace that
unit.

Maintenance Manual
No. Symptoms Probably cause Corrective actions

2 All LEDs and No input power to the  Check the corresponding
fans in corresponding unit circuit breaker in the RAP,
BG-30B off and reset any tripped
breaker.
 Check the circuit breakers in
the RAP and replace if
necessary.
 If the circuit breaker trips
again, disconnect the cable
protected by the
corresponding circuit
breaker from the equipment,
and check the voltage
polarity.
 Check the power cable
condition and make sure the
cable is not damaged and
does not cause short circuits.
 Check proper cable
connection at both ends.
3 BG-30B card Technical failure in the  Consult General
FAIL indicator corresponding unit troubleshooting procedures
on for BG-30B power-on based
on LEDs on MCP30 panel
for guidance in resolving the
problem.
 If the problem still exists
after Step 1, replace the unit.

Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Using
Component Indicators
The management station usually provides onsite personnel with a list of
suspected components.
Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators.
These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to
rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component in accordance with
the procedures outlined in the following tables.
NOTE: For a description of indicator functions, see the

CAUTION: The following corrective actions are

traffic-affecting.
Table 6-3: General troubleshooting procedures for BG-30B power-on based on

LEDs on MCP30 panel
Symptom Probable cause Corrective action

Indicators on MCP30 panel
FAIL ACT MJR MNR
Off Off Off Off No power supply  If all LEDs of the shelf
on MCP30 are off, refer to the
Troubleshooting Power
Problems table, item 3.
 If the problem still exists,
try reinserting the
MCP30.
replace the MCP30 card.
after replacing the
MCP30 card, check for a
problem on the slot for
the MCP30. Replace the
shelf.
On On On On No usable basic  Extract and reinsert the
boot inside the MCP30 card.
MCP30 card’s  If the problem still exists,
flash replace the MCP30 card.

Maintenance Manual

FAIL ACT MJR MNR
On Off Blink Off SD card out or  Extract the MCP30 card
cannot be and check if the SD card
detected is properly installed. If
the SD card is not
installed, install one.
Otherwise, extract and
reinsert the SD card to
make sure the card is
inserted in place.
extract the MCP30 and
replace the SD card in the
MCP30.
after replacing the SD
card, replace the entire
MCP30 card.
On On On Off Vx_Boot inside  Extract and reinsert the
SD card not found MCP30.
extract the SD card from
the MCP30 card and
reprogram the SD card
via SD facilities (card
reader and SD loader
software).
replace the SD card.
On On On Blink Failed to load  Extract and reinsert the
Vx_Boot in the MCP30.
SD card  If the problem still exists,
the MCP30 card, and
software).

Maintenance Manual

FAIL ACT MJR MNR
On Blink Blink Blink Failed to mount  Extract and reinsert the
file system inside MCP30.
SD card  If the problem still exists,
the MCP30 card, and
software).
On Blink Blink On File system inside  Log in the MCP30 in
SD card boot status using the
unformatted LCT-BGF Boot
Configuration Tool, and
then format the SD card.
On Off Off Blink Startup file used  Log in the MCP30 in
for loading boot status using the
software not LCT-BGF Boot
found Configuration Tool, and
set the active version
properly.
On Off Off On Invalid startup  Log in the MCP30 in
file boot status using the
LCT-BGF Boot
set the active version
properly.
On Off Off Off Invalid startup  Log in the MCP30 in
parameter boot status using the
LCT-BGF Boot
then set the active
version properly.
On Off Blink Blink Software package  Log in the MCP30 in
not found boot status using the
LCT-BGF Boot
then download the
version and activate it.

Maintenance Manual

FAIL ACT MJR MNR
On Off Blink On Failed to  Log in the MCP30 in
decompress the boot status using the
software package LCT-BGF Boot
then download the
version and activate it.
On Off On Blink Install file that  Log in the MCP30 in
carries the basic boot status using the
parameters for the LCT-BGF Boot
NE not found Configuration Tool, and
then set the NE ID,
gateway mode, related
IP, and mask properly.
On Off On Off Invalid install file  Log in the MCP30 in
boot status using the
LCT-BGF Boot
then set the NE ID,
On On Off On Invalid NE  Log in the MCP30 in
parameter boot status using the
LCT-BGF Boot
then set the NE ID,
On On Off Blink Failed to mount  Extract and reinsert the
file system 2 MCP30.
inside SD card  If the problem still exists,
the MCP30 card, and
software).

Maintenance Manual
For normal operation, after system power-on or card insertion, the LEDs on the
Tslot and XIO card panels should display as follows:
 ACT: On
 FAIL: Off
When MCP30 software is running normally, after three to five minutes, the
ACT LED starts to blink periodically and the FAIL LED is permanently off
when no failure is detected.
Table 6-4: General troubleshooting procedures for Tslot or XIO panels
Indicators on Tslot or XIO Probable cause Corrective actions

module panels
FAIL ACT
Off Off No power supply  Check if it is caused by
power module failure or no
power input.
 Try extracting the module
and reinserting it.
replace the module.
When the MCP30 is operating normally, the ACT LED should blink
periodically and the FAIL LED should be permanently off.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-5: General troubleshooting procedures for the MCP30
No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions

1 ACT LED is  Incorrect version or  Perform a warm reset on
permanently on database the BG-30B by pressing
or off  Faulty Card the RST button.
 If the ACT indicator starts
to blink, observe it for five
minutes to ensure that the
problem has been
resolved.
 If the ACT indicator still
does not blink after a
warm reset, extract and
reinsert the MCP30.
try a version download
again using the LCT-BGF
Boot Configuration Tool.
delete the NE database and
reconfigure the NE.
replace the MCP30 and
reconfigure the NE.
2 FAIL indicator Hardware failure  Obtain the BIT code of the
on MCP30 from the
management system in
order to see detailed
information regarding the
failure. Then, act
accordingly.
 Perform a cold reset to the
card from the management
system or extract and
reinsert the card.
replace MCP30 card.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-6: General troubleshooting procedures on Tslot and XIO module panels

1 ACT indicator Indicator failure Select Maintenance > LED
permanently on Test in the LCT-BGF menu. If
or off the test executes successfully,
but the indicator does not blink
for 10 seconds, the LED may
be damaged.
 FPGA load failure  Check whether the
 Software or system BIT-Fail of the “FPGA
problem load fail” exists by
obtaining the BIT code of
the card using the
LCT-BGF or the
EMS-BGF. If yes, reinsert
the card or perform a cold
reset to the card.
 If no “FPGA load fail”
exists, extract the MCP30
and reinsert it.
 If the ACT indicator starts
to blink, observe it for five
minutes to ensure that the
problem has been resolved.
extract and reinsert the
faulty card.
power off the entire
BG-30B unit and power on
again, if permitted.
replace the card or
reconfigure the NE
database.
2 FAIL indicator Card hardware failure  Obtain the BIT code from
on the management system
(LCT-BGF or EMS-BGF).
This code details the
failure cause. Perform the
necessary actions, based
on this code.
 Reinsert or cold reset the
card. If the problem still
exists, replace the card.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-7: General troubleshooting procedures for the INF_30B/INF_30BH and

INF_30BH

1 Green ACT Power failure  Check if the input power voltage
indicator always is within the correct range. If
off not, check the power problem
according to the Troubleshooting
Power Problems table.
 Replace the
INF_30B/INF_30BH OR
INF_30BH.
Table 6-8: General troubleshooting procedures for the FCU_30B/FCU_30BH

1 Green ACT Power failure  Check the power system.
indicator  Replace the
permanently off FCU_30B/FCU_30BH.
2 FAIL indicator Fan fail  Extract the module and reinsert
on the unit.
replace the module.
The following table relates to the following cards/modules: XIO30_1,

XIO30Q_1&4, XIO30_4, XIO30_16, SMD1B, SMQ1&4, SMS4, and SMD4.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-9: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins

1 Green SFP module  On the LCT-BGF, if the SFP
transceiver damage type cannot be successfully
Laser On obtained, the IDPROM of the
indicator off SFP module may be damaged.
You should replace it.
 If the SFP type information is
consistent with the expected SFP
type, force the laser on through
the LCT-BGF. The Laser On
indicator should be on. If not, the
SFP module or the optical
module is damaged. Replace the
damaged module.
Incorrect  On the LCT-BGF, check
configuration whether there is a
SFP-ID-Failure alarm in the
corresponding optical interface.
If yes, replace the SFP module
purchased from ECI Telecom.
Then, check the SFP module
type. If it is not the same as the
expected SFP type, replace the
SFP module with the proper
type.

Maintenance Manual

Corresponding  Check that all the fibers are
optical transmitter properly connected to the
may have been corresponding optical
turned off by the transceiver.
ALS function (see  When available, select
the following note) Maintenance > Laser
Management > Laser Switch >
Force Laser On in the
LCT-BGF to activate the
corresponding laser.
 Use an OPM to measure the
output optical power. If the
output optical power is not
within the range of minimum
and maximum levels specified in
the BroadGate Product Line
System Specifications during a
90-second period, the problem is
in the transmit side of the
transceiver. Remove and reinsert
the transceiver.
 Check the output optical power
again. If the output optical power
is still not within the range of
minimum and maximum levels
specified in the BroadGate
Product Line System
Specifications, replace the
transceiver.
 If the problem still exists, check
the received optical power with
an OPM. If the optical power is
within the range of minimum
and maximum levels specified in
the BroadGate Product Line
System Specifications, replace
the transceiver.
 If the problem still exists after
following the previous steps,
check the remote site.
 If there are no problems on both
sites, the problem may be in the
optical fiber between the two
sites.
 NOTE: Be sure to turn on the
ALS function after performing
all checks.

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its

. transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost.
Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction which
turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network
and generates a large number of alarms. As a result, it may be
difficult to identify the real cause of the problem, and you
may need to use the management station log records to
identify the port.
Each Fast Ethernet port has two LEDs that reside on the RJ-45 connector. One
is a link indication (green), and the other is a speed indication (orange).
Table 6-10: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMFE_4_L1, DMFE_4_L2, and

DMEOP_4

1 Link indicator Disconnection or  Check if a cable is disconnected.
off consequent action If yes, reconnect it.
of EoS TSF/CSF  Check if customer equipment is
powered off or has a fault.
 Check whether the CSF of the
related port is enabled using the
management system. If CSF is
enabled, change it to disabled.
 If the link is up after the CSF is
disabled, identify the link-off
cause, according to the relevant
procedure.
 If the problem still exists, extract
and reinsert the card.
replace the
DMFE_4_L1/DMFE_4_L2 card.
2 Speed indicator 10 Mbps link or  Check if 10 Mbps is the
off link fail expected speed for this link. If
yes, then no problem exists. If
the expected speed is 100 Mbps,
then this speed is problematic.
 Restart autonegotiation by
forcing the interface to
100 Mbps full-duplex mode and
then change it back to
autonegotiate.
 Check whether the customer
equipment supports
autonegotiation. If it does not,
force the port to the same mode
supported by the customer
equipment.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-11: General troubleshooting procedures for extended cards (PE1_63,

P345_3, SM_10E, ESW_2G_8F_E, S1_4, and S4_1)

1 Both red FAIL Boot damaged Extract the card and reinsert it into
indicator and red the extended slot on the BG-30E. If
Alarm indicator this does not resolve the problem,
do not turn off replace the module.
after power-on
2 Green ACT Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED Test
indicator off in the LCT-BGF menu and check
that the indicator blinks for some
time. If not, replace the module.
FPGA in module  Power off and wait a few
downloaded minutes before powering on
unsuccessfully again.
 If the Green ACT indicator is
still off, download and activate
the NE embedded software
package either through the
LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the new embedded
software package is activated,
the ACT indicator should be on
and the FAIL indicator should
be off.
Defective module  If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the module.
 If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the BG-30B unit.
Red FAIL Embedded software  Power off and wait a few
indicator on or and FPGA not minutes before powering on
not turning off downloaded again.
after power-on  If the Red FAIL indicator is
and reset still on, download and activate
the NE embedded software
package either through the
LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
software package is activated,
the ACT indicator should be on
and the FAIL indicator should
be off.

Maintenance Manual

Damaged software or  Perform a warm reset on the
defective BG-30B by pushing the RST
card/module button.
 If the FAIL indicator is on
after reset, download and
activate the NE embedded
software package either
through the LCT-BGF or the
Boot Configuration Tool.
 After the software is
completely downloaded to the
BG-30B, the ACT indicator
should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
 If the FAIL indicator turns on
again, replace the module.
Table 6-12: Special troubleshooting procedures for P345_3 card

1 Orange mode Corresponding port Check with the management station
indicator off configured to E3 operator to determine whether the
module has already been
configured for DS-3. If not, ignore
the state of the Mode indicator.
Defective indicators If the port is in DS-3 mode, the
indicator should be on. If not,
replace the card.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-13: Special troubleshooting procedures for ESW_2G_8F_E cards

1 Right green Link down or  No trail on the corresponding
LED in the defective indicator Ethernet ports indicates a
FE-P1~FE-P8 normal state.
RJ-45 off  If there are trails on the
corresponding Ethernet ports,
check whether there is a CSF
alarm in the corresponding
Ethernet trails.
 If yes, try to find the reason for
the CSF problems and resolve
it, and check the link status
again.
 Make sure the cable connected
to the corresponding port is not
damaged.
 Connect the cable to an
Ethernet analyzer. If a normal
signal is detected, the indicator
is defective or the port is
unavailable. Replace the card.
2 Left orange 10 Mbps link or  Check the port attributes in the
LED in the defective indicator LCT-BGF. If the speed status
FE-P1~FE-P8 is 10 Mbps, it is in normal
RJ-45 off state.
 If the speed status in the
LCT-BGF is 100 Mbps, the
BG-30B or indicator is
defective. Replace the card.
3 Green SFP module  On the LCT-BGF, get the
transceiver laser damaged current alarm, if there is a
of GbE LAN SFP-ID-Fail alarm, the
indicator off IDPROM of the SFP module
may be damaged. You should
replace it.
 Force the laser on through the
LCT-BGF. The laser on
the SFP module or the optical
module is damaged. Replace
the damaged module.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-14: General troubleshooting procedures for daughterboards on SM_10E

cards

1 Green ACT Defective indicator or  Check whether the
indicator off after defective daughterboard SM_10E card is running,
power-on or reset meaning that the ACT
LED is blinking. If yes,
extract the daughterboard
and reinsert it again.
 If the Green ACT indicator
does not turn on too,
replace the daughterboard.
Defective Dslot on If replacing the daughterboard
SM_10E does not resolve the problem,
replace the SM_10E card.
2 Red FAIL BIT fail Replace the module.
indicator on after
power-on or reset
Table 6-15: Special troubleshooting procedures for SM_EOP daughter boards

1 Left green LED Link down or defective  No trail on the
in the Port 1 or indicator corresponding Ethernet
Port 2 RJ-45 off ports indicates a normal
state.
 If there are trails on the
corresponding Ethernet
ports, check whether there
is a CSF alarm in the
corresponding Ethernet
trails.
 If yes, try to find the
reason for the CSF
problem and resolve it, and
check the link status again.
 Make sure the cable
connected to the
corresponding port is not
damaged.
Ethernet analyzer. If a
normal signal is detected,
the indicator is defective or
the port is unavailable.
Replace the card.

Maintenance Manual

2 Right orange 10 Mbps link or defective  Check the port attributes in
LED in the Port indicator the LCT-BGF. If the speed
1 or Port 2 RJ-45 status is 10 Mbps, it is in
off normal state.
LCT-BGF is 100 Mbps,
the indicator is defective.
Replace the card.
Table 6-16: Special troubleshooting procedures for OW box

1 Green ACT Power failure  Power off and wait a few
indicator is minutes before powering
always off on again.
 If the indicator is still off,
replace the OW box.
Select Maintenance > LED
Test in the LCT-BGF menu,
and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the OW box.
2. Both ACT and S/W on OW box Replace OW box.
Fail Indicators damaged
blink
3 Red FAIL Connection between  Check the alarms on the
indicator on OW and BG-30B OW through LCT-BGF.
failure or faulty OW  If there is Card-out alarm,
box check the connection
between BG-30B and the
OW box, and try to solve it
by reconnecting the cable
or replacing the cable.
 If there is a BIT-fail alarm,
replace the OW box.
Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED
replace the OW box.

Maintenance Manual

4 Green In Use OW phone not in use  If the OW phone is on
indicator off hook, the indicator should
be off; it is normal. Pick
the phone up; the indicator
should be on.
replace the OW box.
5 Green NET A OW not working on Check if OW is working on
indicator off Group A group A. If not, ignore the state
of the indicator.
replace the OW box.
6 Green NET B OW not working on Check if OW is working on
indicator off Group B group B. If not, ignore the state
of the indicator.
replace the OW box.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-17: Special troubleshooting procedures for TP21_2/TP63_1/TPS1_1 cards

1 Green ACT Defective indicator or Extract the card out and reinsert it
indicator off power fault in. If the indicator is still off,
after power-on or replace the card.
reset
Defective card  If the ACT indicator is still
off, replace the module.
 If the ACT indicator is still
off, replace the BG-30E unit.
2 Red FAIL FPGA not downloaded  Power off and wait a few
indicator on or minutes before powering on.
not turning off  If the Red FAIL indicator is
after power-on still on, download and
and reset activate the NE embedded
software package either
through the LCT-BGF or
through the Boot
Configuration Tool.
software package is active,
the ACT indicator should be
on and the FAIL indicator
should be off.
3 Yellow traffic Corresponding port not Check with the management
indicator off on the working path station operator to determine
whether the port is on the
working path. If not, ignore the
state of the Mode indicator.
Defective indicators If the port is on the working path,
the indicator should be on. If not,
replace the card.
Table 6-18: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMFX_4_L1 and DMFX_4_L2

1 Green transceiver SFP module damaged  If there is an SFP-ID-Fail
laser of FX LAN alarm, on the LCT-BGF, the
replace it.
 Force the laser on through
the LCT-BGF. The laser on
the damaged module.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-19: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMGE_1_L1

1 Right green LED Link down or defective  No trail on the corresponding
in the RJ-45 off indicator Ethernet ports indicates a
normal state.
 If there are trails on the
corresponding Ethernet ports,
check whether there is a CSF
alarm in the corresponding
Ethernet trails.
 If yes, try to find the reason
for the CSF problems and
resolve it, and check the link
status again.
 Make sure the cable
connected to the
corresponding port is not
damaged.
Ethernet analyzer. If a
normal signal is detected, the
indicator is defective or the
port is unavailable. Replace
the card.
2 Left orange LED 10 Mbps link or  Check the port attributes in
in the RJ-45 off defective indicator the LCT-BGF. If the speed
status is 10 Mbps, it is in
normal state.
LCT-BGF is 100 Mbps, the
BG-30B or indicator is
defective. Replace the card.
3 Green SFP module damaged  On the LCT-BGF, get the
transceiver laser current alarm, if there is an
of GbE LAN SFP-ID-Fail alarm, the
replace it.
the damaged module.

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-20: Special troubleshooting procedures for DMGE_4_L1 and DMGE_2_L2

1 Green transceiver SFP module damaged  On the LCT-BGF, get the
laser of GbE current alarm. If there is an
LAN indicator SFP-ID-Fail alarm, the
off IDPROM of the SFP module
replace it.
the damaged module.
Replacing Cards and Modules

Safety and Workmanship
Refer to Before You Start for safety and workmanship instructions.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices

PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING
PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED
BG-30 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To
prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions
listed in Protection Against ESD (on page 2-23). Keep parts
and cards in their antistatic packaging material until you are
ready to install them.
Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack when handling cards and modules
during installation, removal, or connection to internal
connectors.

Maintenance Manual
Before you start:

When inserting cards and modules, be sure to carefully align the card or
module with the shelf guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion,
immediately retract the card/module and then repeat the process.
Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and
modules.
Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure
that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent
connector pins.
Before replacing any card, module, or optical transceiver:

1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged
during shipment.
2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection
packaging, and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during
shipment. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component
identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the
component to be replaced.
After replacing a component:

1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.
2. Attach a report to the packaging explaining the reason for the replacement,
and identify the network site, physical location, shelf, and time of
replacement.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing the MCP30 Card

This section provides replacement instructions for the MCP30 card in the
BG-30B shelf.
CAUTION: Replacing the MCP30 card does not affect traffic

on other Tslot cards. However, T3/T4 synchronization
signals, the E1-based DCC clear channel, and OW traffic are
unavailable for the duration of the replacement.
To replace an MCP30 card in the BG-30B shelf:

1. Mark each cable connected to the MCP30 card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the MCP30 card.
3. Loosen and remove the two screws.
4. Hold the handle on the MCP30 panel and pull the card to be replaced
outward until it is released from the backplane.
5. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the card out of the shelf.
6. Extract the SD (or CF) card from the replaced MCP30 card. Push the SD
(or CF) card and then release it to remove the card from the slot
automatically.
7. Insert the SD (or CF) card into the replacement MCP30 card. Be sure the
card is properly locked.
8. Insert the rear end of the replacement card into the corresponding card
guides.
9. Push the replacement card in until the front panel of the card is flush with
flush, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
10. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the card to the BG-30B shelf.
11. Reconnect all cables for the MCP30 card according to the cable marks.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing XIO30 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the XIO30 cards in the
BG-30B shelf.
CAUTION: Because of XIO30 card redundancy, all the traffic

on the main XIO30 can be protected by the standby XIO30
when replacing the main XIO30. To avoid breaks in traffic,
the XIO30 cards must be replaced one by one. It is important
that the standby XIO30 card be running before replacing the
main XIO30 card.
To replace an XIO30 card in the BG-30B shelf:

1. Mark the fibers connected to the XIO30 card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all fibers connecting the XIO30 card.
4. Hold the handle on the XIO30 card panel and pull the card to be replaced
guides.
9. Reconnect the fibers for the XIO30 card according to the cable marks.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing Tslot Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for Tslot cards in the BG-30B
shelf.
To replace a Tslot card in the BG-30B shelf:

1. Mark each cable connected to the Tslot card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the Tslot card.
4. Hold the handle on the Tslot card panel and pull the card to be replaced
guides.
9. Reconnect all cables for the Tslot card according to the cable marks.
Replacing Eslot Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for Eslot cards in the BG-30E
shelf.
NOTE: All Eslot cards support live insertion. There is no

need to power-off the BG-30B or the BG-30E units when
replacing them.
To replace an Eslot card in the BG-30E shelf:

1. Mark each cable connected to the Eslot card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the Eslot card.
4. Hold the handles on the Eslot card panel and pull the module to be replaced
5. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the module out of the shelf.
6. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.

Maintenance Manual
7. Push the replacement module in until the front panel of the module is flush
with the front of the BG-30E shelf. If resistance is felt before the
connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-30E shelf.
9. Reconnect all cables for the Eslot card according to the cable marks.
Replacing Traffic Modules on the SM_10E

This section provides replacement instructions for traffic modules on the
SM_10E card.
NOTE: All traffic modules on the SM_10E support live

insertion. There is no need to extract the SM_10E card when
replacing it.
To replace a traffic module on the SM_10E:

1. Mark each cable connected to the traffic module on the SM_10E card for
identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the traffic module.
4. Hold the handles on the traffic module panel and pull the module to be
replaced outward until it is released from the SM_10E card.
5. Continue to hold the handle and gently pull the module out of the card.
module guides.
with the front of the SM_10E card. If resistance is felt before the
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the SM_10E card.
9. Reconnect all cables for the traffic module according to the cable marks.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing ICPs for the SM_10E

This section provides replacement instructions for replacing an ICP for an
SM_10E card.
To replace an ICP for the SM_10E:

1. Mark each cable connected to the ICP for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the ICP.
3. Loosen and remove the four screws.
4. Replace the ICP and close the screws to fasten the ICP to the shelf.
5. Reconnect all cables for the ICP according to the cable marks.
Replacing Power Modules
CAUTION:
 If using a DC power supply each BG-30B/BG-30E shelf
has two power modules, therefore, replacing the power
module does not cause the NE to power off.
 Replace INF_30 modules one at a time so that the system
is not powered off.
To replace the power module:

1. Cut off the power source connected to the power module by turning off the
corresponding power switch on the RAP.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the replaced power module on the panel.
3. Open the two screws fastening the power module to the shelf.
4. Hold the handle on the panel and pull the module to be replaced outward
until it is released from the backplane.
module guides.
with the front of the BG-30B or BG-30E shelf. If resistance is felt before
the connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-30B or
BG-30E shelf.
9. Reconnect the power cable to the replacement power module.
10. Turn on the power switch on the RAP.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing the
FCU_30B/FCU_30BH/FCU_30E Module
This section provides replacement instructions for the
FCU_30B/FCU_30BH/FCU_30E module in the BG-30 shelf.
CAUTION:
 Each BG-30B/BG-30E shelf has one FCU module.
 Replace the FCU module as soon as possible, as the
temperature inside the BG-30B/BG-30E continues to rise
without the fan unit. The high temperature can cause
hardware damage.
To replace an FCU_30B/FCU_30BH/FCU_30E module in the

BG-30B/BG-30E shelf:
1. Loosen and remove the screws on the panel.
2. Hold the handle on the FCU_30B/FCU_30BH/FCU_30E panel and pull the
card to be replaced outward until it is released from the backplane.
4. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding card
guides.
with the front of the BG-30B/BG-30E shelf. If resistance is felt before the
6. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-30B/BG-30E
shelf.
Replacing an ICP for the MCP30

This section provides replacement instructions for replacing an ICP for the
MCP30 card.
To replace an ICP for the MCP30:

1. Mark each cable connected to the ICP for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the ICP.
3. Loosen and remove the four screws.
4. Replace the ICP and close the screws to fasten the ICP to the shelf.
5. Reconnect all cables for the ICP according to the cable marks.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers

ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP/XFP transceivers in all optical
interfaces and electrical STM-1 interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided
you observe all the safety precautions described in Before You Start during the
replacement.
To replace an SFP/XFP transceiver:

1. Mark each fiber or cable connected to the transceiver for identification
purposes.
2. Identify the position of the SFP/XFP transceiver to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the fibers or cables connected to the transceiver.
4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed
position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place (see the following figure). If you feel resistance before the
transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the
insertion.
Figure 6-1: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an XIO module
6. Reconnect the fibers or cables disconnected in Step 3.

Maintenance Manual

A
Connection Data
In this appendix:
Overview ........................................................................................................ A-2
INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E DC Input Power Connectors ........................ A-2
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E AC Input Power Connectors .................. A-2
MNG Ethernet Connector ............................................................................... A-3
T3/T4 Timing Connector ................................................................................ A-4
Auxiliary Connector on the MCP30 ............................................................... A-5
RS-232 Connector .......................................................................................... A-7
Orderwire Connector ...................................................................................... A-8
V.11 Overhead Connector .............................................................................. A-9
Alarms Connector ......................................................................................... A-10
E1 Connectors on the PME1_21 .................................................................. A-11
PME1_63 Connection Data .......................................................................... A-15
Ethernet Interface Connectors ...................................................................... A-23
PM345_3 Card Connection Data .................................................................. A-23
P345_3E Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-23
PE1_63 Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-23
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data........................................................ A-24
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection Data ............................................................ A-24
DMGE_1_L1 Connection Data .................................................................... A-25
TP21_2 Connection Data.............................................................................. A-25
TP63_1 Connection Data.............................................................................. A-30
TPS1_1 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-30
SM_10E Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-30
ICP_VF Connection Data ............................................................................. A-41
ICP_V24 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-43
ICP_V35 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-45
RAP-4B Connectors ..................................................................................... A-46
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary A-1

Connection Data BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Overview
This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in the
BG-30B/BG-30E shelves and associated ancillary equipment supplied by ECI
Telecom.
Any connectors not described in this appendix are reserved for use by ECI
Telecom technical support personnel and/or for future expansion, and therefore
no user equipment may be connected to them.
INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E
DC Input Power Connectors
The DC input power connectors, designated POWER IN, are 3-pin D-type
male connectors located on the INF_30B/INF_30BH/INF_30E panel. The
following figure identifies the functions of the POWER IN connector pins, as
seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-1: POWER IN input power connector, pin functions
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E
AC Input Power Connectors
AC input power connectors are located on the
AC_CONV_30B/AC_CONV_30E front panel, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure A-2: AC input power connector
A-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Connection Data
Maintenance Manual
MNG Ethernet Connector

The Ethernet connector located on the MCP30 panel, designated MNG, is an
eight-pin RJ-45 connector that provides an Ethernet 10BaseT management
interface.
The Ethernet connector is wired as a station port intended for direct connection
through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector.
Figure A-3: Ethernet connector, PIN identification
Table A-1: Ethernet connector, pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction

1 TX+ Transmit, + wire Output
2 TX- Transmit, - wire Output
3 RX+ Receive, + wire Input
4, 5 N/C Not connected ---
6 RX- Receive, - wire Input
7 N/C Not connected ---
8 N/C Not connected ---

Maintenance Manual
T3/T4 Timing Connector

The T3/T4 timing connector is an RJ-45 connector that is located on the
MCP30 panel and designated as T3/T4. The interface includes a group of lines
that are usually connected to the site timing reference distribution subsystem:
 Clock input (T3 2.048 Mbps or 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703
interface)
 Clock output (T4 2.048 Mbps or 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703
interface)
the connector. The following table lists the pin assignment for the connector. It
also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables
offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Figure A-4: T3/T4 connector, pin identification
Table A-2: T3/T4 connector, PIN identification
Pin Name Function Direction Wire color

1 CLK2MHZ_IN(A) 2 MHz clock input Input Blue
2 CLK2MHZ_IN(B) Input White/Blue
3 CLK2MHZ_OUT(A) 2 MHz clock output Output Green
4 CLK2MHZ_OUT(B) Output White/Green
5 CLK2MBIT_IN(A) 2 Mbps clock input Input Brown
6 CLK2MBIT_IN(B) Input White/Brown
7 CLK2MBIT_OUT(A) 2 Mbps clock output Output Orange
8 CLK2MBIT_OUT(B) Output White/Orange

Maintenance Manual
Auxiliary Connector on the

MCP30
The MCP30 provides one Auxiliary interface on its front panel. This 36-pin
VHDCI female connector, designated as Auxiliary, serves V.11, RS-232,
alarm, and OW signals. There are two options for using this connector:
 If only Alarms interfaces are used, a special alarm cable supplied by ECI
Telecom can be connected to the Auxiliary connector directly and can only
serve alarm signals.
 If other interfaces are also used, the ICP_MCP30, which distributes the
concentrated Auxiliary connector into dedicated connectors for each
function, must be connected to this Auxiliary connector through a
back-to-back cable.
connector. It also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin
in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary
connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-5: Auxiliary connector for MCP30/MCP64, pin identification
Table A-3: 1-11 Auxiliary connector, pin assignment
Pin in VHDCI36 Name Function Direction Pin in SCSI-36

MCP30 ICP_MCP30
1 AL_INA1 First alarm input wire A Input 1
2 AL_INB1 First alarm input wire B Input 2
3 AL_INA3 Third alarm input wire A Input 3
4 AL_INB3 Third alarm input wire B Input 4
5 AL_OUTA1 First alarm output wire A Output 5
6 AL_OUTB1 First alarm output wire B Output 6
7 AL_OUT3(B2) Third alarm output, Output 7
normally open
8 N/C Not connected --- 8
9 RXD Channel receive Input 9
10 N/C Not connected --- 10

Maintenance Manual
Pin in VHDCI36 Name Function Direction Pin in SCSI-36

MCP30 ICP_MCP30
11 OW_2M_INP Orderwire input wire A Input 11
12 OW_2M_INN Orderwire input wire B Input 12
13 V11TXDA Transmit data A From DTE 13
14 V11TXDB Transmit data B From DTE 14
15 V11RCLKA Receive timing A To DTE 15
16 V11RCLKB Receive timing B To DTE 16
17 V11RXDA Receive data A To DTE 17
18 V11RXDB Receive data B To DTE 18
19 AL_INA2 Second alarm input wire A Input 19
20 AL_INB2 Second alarm input wire B Input 20
21 AL_INA4 Fourth alarm input wire A Input 21
22 AL_INB4 Fourth alarm input wire B Input 22
23 AL_OUTA2 Second alarm output wire A Output 23
24 AL_OUTB2 Second alarm output wire B Output 24
25 AL_OUTA3 Third alarm output, Output 25
common
26 AL_OUT3(B1) Third alarm output, Output 26
normally closed
27 RS232_GND Ground --- 27
28 TXD Channel transmit Output 28
29 OW_2M_OUTP Orderwire output wire A Output 29
30 OW_2M_OUTN Orderwire output wire B Output 30
31 V11_RCA Terminal timing A From DTE 31
32 V11_RCB Terminal timing A From DTE 32
33 V11_TCLKA Transmit timing A To DTE 33
34 V11_TCLKB Transmit timing B To DTE 34
35 V11_GND GND --- 35
36 CGND CGND --- 36
Shell --- Braid --- Shell

Maintenance Manual
RS-232 Connector
There is one RS-232 connector that provides a debug RS-232 interface. The
RS-232 interface is an RJ-45 connector that is located on the ICP_MCP30
panel and is designated as RS-232.
The following figure shows an RS-232 cable from the RJ-45 connector to the
DB-9 female connector. The following table lists the connector pin assignment
for both the RJ-45 connector and the DB-9 connector, when using the RS-232
cable supplied by ECI Telecom.
Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification
Figure A-7: RS-232 overhead cable
Figure A-8: RS-232 overhead cable label

Maintenance Manual
Table A-4: RS-232 connectors, pin assignment
Pin in RJ-45 Name Function Direction Pin in DB-9

1 COM-TX Channel transmit Output 2
2 GND Ground --- 5
3, 4, 5, 6 --- Not connected --- ---
7 COM-RX Channel receive Input 3
8 GND Ground --- ---
Orderwire Connector
The OW connector is an RJ-45 connector that is located on the ICP_MCP30
panel and is designated as OW. The interface includes a pair of E1 balanced
interfaces that is connected to an RJ-45 connector on the BG-OW front panel.
the connector. The following table lists the pin assignment for the orderwire
connector at both the BG-30B and BG-OW ends, when using the OW cable
supplied by ECI Telecom.
Figure A-9: OW connector, pin identification
Table A-5: OW connector, pin assignment
Pin (in BG-30B) Name Function Direction Pin (in BG-OW)

1 OW_IN(A) Orderwire input Input 1
2 OW_IN(B) Input 2
3 OW_OUT(A) Orderwire Output 5
output
4 OW_OUT(B) Output 6
5 --- --- --- 3
6 --- --- --- 4
7 --- --- --- 7
8 --- --- --- 8

Maintenance Manual
V.11 Overhead Connector

The V.11 overhead connector is a 15-pin high-density D-type female connector
on the ICP_MCP30 panel.
The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into
the connector. The following table lists the connector pin assignment.
Figure A-10: V.11 connector, pin identification
Table A-6: V.11 overhead connector, pin assignment

1 V11_RCLK(-) Receive timing A To DTE Brown
2 V11_TCLK(-) Transmit timing A To DTE Red
3 V11_RXD(-) Receive data A To DTE Orange
4 V11_TTCLK(-) Terminal timing A From DTE Yellow
5 V11_TXD(-) Transmit data A From DTE Green
6 V11_RCLK(+) Receive timing B To DTE Brown/Gray ring
7 V11_TCLK(+) Transmit timing B To DTE Red/Gray ring
8 V11_RXD(+) Receive data B To DTE Orange/Gray ring
9 V11_TTCLK(+) Terminal timing B From DTE Yellow/Gray ring
10 V11_TXD(+) Transmit data B From DTE Green/Gray ring
11 --- Not connected --- ---
14 GND Ground --- Blue
15 CGND Chassis ground --- Drain wire (braided)

Maintenance Manual
Alarms Connector
The Alarms connector, designated ALARMS, is a 15-pin D-type male
connector on the ICP_MCP30 panel that provides an alarm interface
connecting to the RAP. The connector supports two groups of lines:
 Four external alarm input lines. The alarm input lines are monitored by the
BG-30 management subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode
of an optocoupler.
 Three alarm output lines. Each output is provided by a relay dry contact.
Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open state and 1A in closed state.
The Alarms connector can be connected in one of the following configurations:
 Direct connection to a customer’s alarms collection facilities
 Connection to the RAP
ECI Telecom offers appropriate cables for each of these configurations.
the connector. The following table lists the connector pin assignment.
Figure A-11: Alarms connector, pin identification
Table A-7: Alarms connector, pin assignment

1 ALARM_IN1(A) First alarm input Input Brown
6 ALARM_IN1(B) Input Brown/Gray ring
2 ALARM_IN2(A) Second alarm input Input Red
7 ALARM_IN2(B) Input Red/Gray ring
3 ALARM_IN3(A) Third alarm input Input Orange
8 ALARM_IN3(A) Input Orange/Gray ring
4 ALARM_IN4(A) Fourth alarm input Input Yellow
9 ALARM_IN4(B) Input Yellow/Gray ring
11 ALARM_OUT1(A) First alarm output Output Blue
12 ALARM_OUT1(B) Output Blue/Gray ring

Maintenance Manual

13 ALARM_OUT2(A) Second alarm output Output Violet
14 ALARM_OUT2(B) Output Violet/Gray ring
5 ALARM_OUT3(A) Third alarm output, Output Green
common
10 ALARM_OUT3(B1) Third alarm output, Output Green/Gray ring
normally closed
15 ALARM_OUT3(B2) Third alarm output, Output White
normally open
E1 Connectors on the PME1_21

The PME1_21 provides 21 balanced E1 tributary interfaces through a
SCSI-100 female connector. The SCSI-100 connector serves the 21 × E1
receive and transmit signals.
connector. It also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin
in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary
connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-12: E1 connectors for PME1_21, pin identification
Table A-8: PME1_21 connector, pin assignment

2 TTIP21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output White/Pink ring
3 TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Light Gray/Pink ring
4 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A --- Blue/Pink ring
5 TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B --- Green/Pink ring
6 TTIP19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Yellow/Pink ring
7 TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Orange/Pink ring
9 TTIP18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Red/Pink ring
10 TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Brown/Pink ring

Maintenance Manual

11 TTIP17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output White/Violet ring
12 TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Light Gray/Violet ring
13 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Blue/Violet ring
14 TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output Green/Violet ring
16 TTIP15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Yellow/Violet ring
17 TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Orange/Violet ring
18 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Red/Violet ring
19 TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Brown/Violet ring
20 TTIP13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output White/Orange ring
21 TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Light Gray/Orange ring
23 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Violet/Orange ring
24 TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output Blue/Orange ring
25 TTIP11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Brown/Gray ring
26 TRING11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Brown
27 TTIP10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Red/Gray ring
28 TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Red
30 TTIP9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Orange/Gray ring
31 TRING9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Orange
32 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Yellow/Gray ring
33 TRING8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output Yellow
34 TTIP7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Green/Gray ring
35 TRING7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Green
37 TTIP6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Blue/Gray ring
38 TRING6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Blue
39 TTIP5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Violet/Gray ring
40 TRING5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Violet
41 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output White/Gray ring
42 TRING4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output White
44 TTIP3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Pink/Gray ring
45 TRING3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Pink
46 TTIP2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Red/White ring

Maintenance Manual

47 TRING2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Brown/White ring
48 TTIP1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Yellow/White ring
49 TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output Orange/White ring
52 RTIP21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input Green/Orange ring
53 RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Yellow/Orange ring
54 RTIP20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Red/Orange ring
55 RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Brown/Orange ring
56 RTIP19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input White/Blue ring
57 RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Light Gray/Blue ring
59 RTIP18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Input Violet/Blue ring
60 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Green/Blue ring
61 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Yellow/Blue ring
62 RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Orange/Blue ring
63 RTIP16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Red/Blue ring
64 RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Brown/Blue ring
66 RTIP15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input White/Yellow ring
67 RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input Light Gray/Yellow ring
68 RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Violet/Yellow ring
69 RRING14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input Blue/Yellow ring
70 RTIP13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Green/Yellow ring
71 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Orange/Yellow ring
73 RTIP12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Red/Yellow ring
74 RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Brown/Yellow ring
75 RTIP11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Blue/White ring
76 RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Green/White ring
77 RTIP10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Light Gray/White ring
78 RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input Violet/White ring
80 RTIP9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Yellow/Brown ring
81 RRING9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Red/Brown ring
82 RTIP8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input Green/Brown ring

Maintenance Manual

83 RRING8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input Orange/Brown ring
84 RTIP7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Violet/Brown ring
85 RRING7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Blue/Brown ring
87 RTIP6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Pink/Brown ring
88 RRING6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input Light Gray/Brown ring
89 RTIP5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Light Gray/Red ring
90 RRING5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Brown/Red ring
91 RTIP4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Green/Red ring
92 RRING4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Yellow/Red ring
94 RTIP3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Violet/Red ring
95 RRING3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Blue/Red ring
96 RTIP2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input Pink/Red ring
97 RRING2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input White/Red ring
98 RTIP1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Light Gray/Green ring
99 RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Brown/Green ring
Shelf --- Braid --- ---

Maintenance Manual
PME1_63 Connection Data

The PME1_63 provides 63 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has a 272-pin
VHDCI female connector. If unbalanced E1 interfaces (75 Ω) are required a
conversion patch panel box, like the xDDF-21, must be used. The connector
has two parts, each with 136 pins; the upper part serves the 63 E1 receive
signals and the lower part the 63 E1 transmit signals.
ECI Telecom offers a special cable for connecting to the PME1_63. For a
description of the cable refer to Traffic Cable for PME1_63 (on page 3-70).
The cable end, connecting to the PME1_63 terminates with a double 136-pin
VHDCI male connector. The connector parts are designated as P1 for the
transmit lines and P3 for the receive lines.
the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for
unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the
shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cable offered by ECI Telecom’s Network Solutions
Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame. The
cable marking in the heading of each table refers to the 26AWG cable
connected to the conversion box as designated in the cable description (see
Traffic Cable for PME1_63 (on page 3-70)).
Figure A-13: PME1_63 connector pin identification
Table A-9: Connector P1 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines

Cable a (Red dots on jacket)
1 -- N/C -- --
2 -- N/C -- --
3 TXD_P1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Brown
4 TXD_N1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output Brown/Gray
5 TXD_P2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Red
6 TXD_N2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Red/Gray
7 TXD_P3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Orange
8 TXD_N3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Orange/Gray
9 TXD_P4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Yellow
10 TXD_N4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output Yellow/Gray
11 TXD_P5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Green

Maintenance Manual

Cable a (Red dots on jacket)
12 TXD_N5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Green/Gray
13 TXD_P6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Blue
14 TXD_N6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Blue/Gray
15 TXD_P7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Purple
16 TXD_N7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Purple/Gray
17 TXD_P8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output White
18 TXD_N8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output White/Gray
19 TXD_P9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Pink
20 TXD_N9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Pink/Gray
21 TXD_P10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Brown/White
22 TXD_N10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Red/White
23 TXD_P11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Orange/White
24 TXD_N11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Yellow/White
25 TXD_P12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Green/White
26 TXD_N12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output Blue/White
27 TXD_P13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output Purple/White
28 TXD_N13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Light-Gray/White
29 TXD_P14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Red/Brown
30 TXD_N14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Yellow/Brown
31 TXD_P15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Orange/Brown
32 TXD_N15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Green/Brown
33 TXD_P16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Blue/Brown
34 TXD_N16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output Purple/Brown
35 -- N/C -- --
36 -- N/C -- --
37 TXD_P17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output Light-Gray/Brown
38 TXD_N17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Pink/Brown
39 TXD_P18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Brown/Red
40 TXD_N18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Light-Gray/Red
41 TXD_P19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Yellow/Red
42 TXD_N19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Green/Red
43 TXD_P20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Blue/Red
44 TXD_N20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Output Purple/Red
45 TXD_P21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output White/Red
46 TXD_N21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Pink/Red

Maintenance Manual
Table A-10: Connector P3 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines

Cable b (Red dots on jacket)
91 RXD_N21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input Brown/Yellow
92 RXD_P21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Red/Yellow
93 RXD_N20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Orange/Yellow
94 RXD_P20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Green/Yellow
95 RXD_N19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input Blue/Yellow
96 RXD_P19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Purple/Yellow
97 RXD_N18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Input Light-Gray/Yellow
98 RXD_P18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input White/Yellow
99 RXD_N17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Brown/Blue
100 RXD_P17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Red/Blue
101 -- N/C -- --
102 -- N/C -- --
103 RXD_N16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Orange/Blue
104 RXD_P16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Yellow/Blue
105 RXD_N15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Green/Blue
106 RXD_P15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input Purple/Blue
107 RXD_N14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Light-Gray/Blue
108 RXD_P14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input White/Blue
109 RXD_N13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Brown/Orange
110 RXD_P13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Red/Orange
111 RXD_N12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Yellow/Orange
112 RXD_P12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Green/Orange
113 RXD_N11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Blue/Orange
114 RXD_P11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Purple/Orange
115 RXD_N10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Light-Gray/Orange
116 RXD_P10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input White/Orange
117 RXD_N9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Brown/Purple
118 RXD_P9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Red/Purple
119 RXD_N8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input Orange/Purple
120 RXD_P8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input Yellow/Purple
121 RXD_N7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Green/Purple
122 RXD_P7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Blue/Purple
123 RXD_N6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Light-Gray/Purple
124 RXD_P6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input White/Purple
125 RXD_N5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Brown/Pink
126 RXD_P5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Red/Pink
127 RXD_N4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Orange/Pink
128 RXD_P4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Yellow/Pink
129 RXD_N3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Green/Pink
130 RXD_P3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Blue/Pink
131 RXD_N2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input Light-Gray/Pink

Maintenance Manual

Cable b (Red dots on jacket)
132 RXD_P2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input White/Pink
133 RXD_N1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Pink/Purple
134 RXD_P1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Pink/Yellow
135 -- N/C -- --
136 -- N/C -- --

Cable c (Blue dots on jacket)
48 TXD_N22 Transmit, tributary22, wire B Output Brown/Gray
67 -- N/C -- --
68 -- N/C -- --
69 -- N/C -- --
70 -- N/C -- --

Maintenance Manual

Cable c (Blue dots on jacket)

Cable d (Blue dots on jacket)
67 -- N/C -- --
68 -- N/C -- --
69 -- N/C -- --

Maintenance Manual

Cable d (Blue dots on jacket)
70 -- N/C -- --
78 RXD_P28 Receive, tributary 28, wire B Input Blue/Purple

Cable e (Yellow dots on jacket)
94 TXD_N43 Transmit, tributary 43, wire B Output Brown/Gray

Maintenance Manual

Cable e (Yellow dots on jacket)
135 -- N/C -- --
136 -- N/C -- --

Cable f (Yellow dots on jacket)
1 -- N/C -- --
2 -- N/C -- --

Maintenance Manual

Cable f (Yellow dots on jacket)
32 RXD_P49 Receive, tributary 49 wire B Input Blue/Purple
135 -- N/C -- --
136 -- N/C -- --

Maintenance Manual
Ethernet Interface Connectors

The DMFE_4_L1 provides four 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front
panel. The connectors for the four Ethernet channels are four RJ-45 connectors,
each supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the BG-30B support Auto MDIX.
The figure Ethernet connector, pin identification (on page A-3) identifies the
RJ-45 connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The table
Ethernet connector, pin assignment (on page A-3) lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector.
PM345_3 Card Connection Data

The PM345_3 card provides three unbalanced E3/DS-3 tributary interfaces.
The E3/DS-3 connectors are coaxial connectors (6 x DIN 1.0/2.3) on the
PM345_3 front panel.
P345_3E Card Connection Data

The P345_3E card provides three unbalanced E3/DS-3 tributary interfaces. The
E3/DS-3 connectors are coaxial connectors (6 x DIN 1.0/2.3) on the P345_3E
front panel.
PE1_63 Card Connection Data

The PE1_63 provides 63 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has three twin
68-pin VHDCI female connectors. Each twin 68-pin VHDCI connector serves
the 21 × E1 receive and transmit signals.
The PE1_63 uses the same cable as that for the PME1_21/PME1_42. The
figure E1 connectors for PME1_21, pin identification (on page A-11) identifies
the E1 connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The table
PME1_21 connector, pin assignment (on page A-11) lists the pin assignment
for this connector.

Maintenance Manual
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection

Data
In addition to two GbE interfaces based on SFP modules, the ESW_2G_8F_E
card provides eight 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front panel. The
connectors for the eight Ethernet channels are eight RJ-45 connectors, each
supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the ESW_2G_8F_E support Auto
MDIX. The figure Ethernet connector, pin identification (on page A-3)
identifies the RJ-45 connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
The table Ethernet connector, pin assignment (on page A-3) lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector.
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection

Data
In addition to two GbE interfaces based on SFP modules, the MPS_2G_8F_
card provides two 10/100/1000BaseT (combo ports) and eight 10/100BaseT
interfaces directly from its front panel. The connectors for the two GbE
Ethernet channels and are RJ-45, each supporting 10/100/1000BaseT
interfaces. The connectors for the eight Ethernet channels are eight RJ-45
connectors, each supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the MPS_2G_8F support Auto
MDIX. The figure Ethernet connector, pin identification (on page A-3)
identifies the RJ-45 connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
The table Ethernet connector, pin assignment (on page A-3) lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector.

Maintenance Manual
DMGE_1_L1 Connection Data

The DMGE_1_L1 provides one Gigabit Ethernet port (one 1000BaseT through
an RJ45 connector and one SFP slot for an optical interface).
Table A-15: Gigabit Ethernet connector, pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction

1 A-TX+ A-Transceiver, + wire Bidirectional
2 A-TX- A-Transceiver, - wire
3 B-TX+ B-Transceiver, + wire Bidirectional
6 B-TX- B-Transceiver, - wire
4 C-TX+ C-Transceiver, + wire Bidirectional
5 C-TX- C-Transceiver, - wire
8 D-TX+ D-Transceiver, + wire Bidirectional
7 D-TX- D-Transceiver, - wire
TP21_2 Connection Data

The TP21_2 provides 42 balanced E1 tributary protection interfaces; the card
has five twin 68 pin VHDCI female connectors on its panel. Each VHDCI
connector serves 21 × E1 receive and transmit signals. Two of the connectors
serve 42 balanced E1 tributary customer interfaces; two of the connectors serve
42 balanced E1 tributary protected interfaces; one connector serves 21 balanced
E1 tributary protecting interfaces.
The following figure identifies the VHDCI connector pins, as seen when
looking into the connector. The following table lists the connector pin
assignment for a typical connector. This table also lists the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for
connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-14: E1 connectors for TP21_2, pin identification

Maintenance Manual
Table A-16: Twin 68-pin VHDCI connector (P2), pin assignment
P2 pin Name Function Direction Wire color

2 TTIP11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Brown
3 TRING11 Transmit, tributary 11 wire B Output Brown/Gray ring
5 --- Not connected --- ----
6 TTIP10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Red
7 TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Red/Gray ring
8 TTIP9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Orange
9 TRING9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Orange/Gray ring
12 TRING8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output Yellow
13 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Yellow/Gray ring
14 TTIP7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Green
15 TRING7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Green/Gray ring
18 TTIP6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Blue
19 TRING6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Blue/Gray ring
20 TTIP5 Transmit, tributary 5 wire A Output Violet
21 TRING5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Violet/Gray ring
24 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output White
25 TRING4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output White/Gray ring
26 TTIP3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Pink
27 TRING3 Transmit, tributary 3 wire B Output Pink/Gray ring
30 TTIP2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Brown/White ring
31 TRING2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Red/White ring
32 TTIP1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Orange/White ring
33 TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1 wire B Output Yellow/White ring

Maintenance Manual

36 RTIP11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Green/White ring
37 RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Blue/White ring
40 RTIP10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Violet/White ring
41 RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input Light Gray/White ring
42 RTIP9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Red/Brown ring
43 RRING9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Yellow/Brown ring
46 RRING8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input Orange/Brown ring
47 RTIP8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input Green/Brown ring
48 RRING7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Blue/Brown ring
49 RTIP7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Violet/Brown ring
52 RTIP6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Light Gray/Brown ring
53 RRING6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input Pink/Brown ring
54 RTIP5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Brown/Red ring
55 RRING5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Light Gray/Red ring
58 RTIP4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Yellow/Red ring
59 RRING4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Green/Red ring
60 RTIP3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Blue/Red ring
61 RRING3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Violet/Red ring
64 RTIP2 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input White/Red ring
65 RRING2 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Pink/Red ring
66 RTIP1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Brown/Green ring
67 RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Light Gray/Green ring
68 --- Receive, tributary 14, wire A --- ---
Shelf --- BRAID --- ---

Maintenance Manual
Table A-17: Twin 68-pin VHDCI connector (P1), pin assignment

2 RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Brown/Yellow ring
3 RTIP12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Red/Yellow ring
4 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Orange/Yellow ring
5 RTIP13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Green/Yellow ring
8 RRING14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input Blue/Yellow ring
9 RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Violet/Yellow ring
10 RTIP15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Light Gray/Yellow ring
11 RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input White/Yellow ring
14 RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Brown/Blue ring
15 RTIP16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Red/Blue ring
16 RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Orange/Blue ring
17 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Yellow/Blue ring
20 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Green/Blue ring
21 RTIP18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Input Violet/Blue ring
22 RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Light Gray/Blue ring
23 RTIP19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input White/Blue ring
26 RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Brown/Orange ring
27 RTIP20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Red/Orange ring
28 RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Yellow/Orange ring
29 RTIP21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input Green/Orange ring

Maintenance Manual

36 TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output Blue/Orange ring
37 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Violet/Orange ring
38 TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Light Gray/Orange ring
39 TTIP13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output White/Orange ring
42 TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Brown/Violet ring
43 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Red/Violet ring
44 TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Orange/Violet ring
45 TTIP15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Yellow/Violet ring
48 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Green/Violet ring
49 TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output Blue/Violet ring
50 TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Light Gray/Violet ring
51 TTIP17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output White/Violet ring
54 TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Brown/Pink ring
55 TTIP18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Red/Pink ring
56 TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Orange/Pink ring
57 TTIP19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Yellow/Pink ring
60 TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Output Green/Pink ring
61 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Blue/Pink ring
62 TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Light Gray/Pink ring
63 TTIP21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output White/Pink ring
67 --- Not connected ---t ---
Shelf --- BRAID --- ---

Maintenance Manual
TP63_1 Connection Data

The TP63_1 provides 63 balanced E1 tributary protection interfaces; this card
has seven twin 68 pin VHDCI female connectors on its panel. Three of the
connectors serve 63 balanced E1 tributary customer interfaces; four of the
connector serve 2 x 63 balanced E1 tributary protected interfaces.
For customer interfaces, the typical connector pin assignment is the same as
TP21_2 Connection Data (on page A-25).
TPS1_1 Connection Data

The TPS1_1 provides 4 x STM-1e or 3 x E3/DS3 protection interfaces; this
card has two DB 8W8P connectors and eight 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors on its
panel. The eight 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors serve 4 customer interfaces. The
two DB 8W8P connectors serve 2 x 4 protected interfaces.
SM_10E Card Connection Data

The SM_10E base card does not have any external interfaces. All external
interfaces are from the front panel of each type of SM_10E traffic module. The
following types of SM_10E traffic module are supported:
 SM_FXO_8E
 SM_FXS_8E
 SM_EM_24W_6E
 SM_V24E
 SM_CODIR_4E
 SM_OMNI_E
 SM_EOP
 SM_C37.94
Most types of SM_10E traffic module use the same connector for the cabling
of their external traffic interfaces. This connector is a single SCSI-36 female
connector located on the front panel. The following figure identifies the
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-15: SM_10E traffic module connector, pin identification

Maintenance Manual
The following sections contain tables that describe the pin assignment of the
connector for each type of traffic module. These tables include the color of the
wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom
for connecting between the SM_10E traffic module connector and a
distribution frame.
The SM_EOP has two RJ-45 connectors for connecting to its interfaces. The
SM_C37.94 has two pairs of ST fiber optics connectors for connecting to its
interfaces.
Connection Data for SM_FXO_8E and

SM_FXS_8E Interfaces
The SM_FXO_8E and the SM_FXS_8E each support eight channels. Each
channel has one pair of wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting
between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Table A-18: SM_10E SM_FXO_8 and SM_FXS_8 connector, pin assignment

1 A1 Channel 1, wire A Bidirectional Brown
2 B1 Channel 1, wire B Bidirectional Brown/Black
3 A2 Channel 2, wire A Bidirectional Red
4 B2 Channel 2, wire B Bidirectional Red/Black
5 A3 Channel 3, wire A Bidirectional Orange
6 B3 Channel 3, wire B Bidirectional Orange/Black
7 A4 Channel 4, wire A Bidirectional Yellow
8 B4 Channel 4, wire B Bidirectional Yellow/Black
9 A5 Channel 5, wire A Bidirectional Green
10 B5 Channel 5, wire B Bidirectional Green/Black
11 A6 Channel 6, wire A Bidirectional Blue
12 B6 Channel 6, wire B Bidirectional Blue/Black
13 A7 Channel 7, wire A Bidirectional Violet
14 B7 Channel 7, wire B Bidirectional Violet/Black
15 A8 Channel 8, wire A Bidirectional White
16 B8 Channel 8, wire B Bidirectional White/Black
NOTE: Only eight of 18 pairs of wires are used for the

SM_FXO_8E or SM_FXS_8E interfaces.

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data for SM_EM_24W6E

Interfaces
The SM_EM_24W6E supports six channels. Each channel has one pair of
wires in 2W mode, two pairs of wires in 4W or 2W E&M mode, and three pairs
of wires in 4W E&M mode. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
Table A-19: SM_10E SM_EM_24W6E connector, pin assignment
Pin Name Mode Function Direction Wire color

1 RA1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire A Output Brown
2W Channel 1, wire A Bidirectional
2 RB1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire B Output Brown/Black
2W Channel 1, wire B Bidirectional
3 RA2 4W Channel 2, Rx, wire A Output Red
4 RB2 4W Channel 2, Rx, wire B Output Red/Black
5 RA3 4W Channel 3, Rx, wire A Output Orange
6 RB3 4W Channel 3, Rx, wire B Output Orange/Black
7 RA4 4W Channel 4, Rx, wire A Output Yellow
8 RB4 4W Channel 4, Rx, wire B Output Yellow/Black
9 RA5 4W Channel 5, Rx, wire A Output Green
10 RB5 4W Channel 5, Rx, wire B Output Green/Black
11 RA6 4W Channel 6, Rx, wire A Output Blue
12 RB6 4W Channel 6, Rx, wire B Output Blue/Black
13 E1 Any Channel 1, E Output Violet

Maintenance Manual

14 M1 Any Channel 1, M Input Violet/Black
15 E2 Any Channel 2, E Output White
16 M2 Any Channel 2, M Input White/Black
17 E3 Any Channel 3, E Output Pink
18 M3 Any Channel 3, M Input Pink/Black
19 TA1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire A Input Brown/White
2W --- ---
20 TB1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire B Input Red/White
2W --- ---
21 TA2 4W Channel 2, Tx, wire A Input Orange/White
2W --- ---
22 TB2 4W Channel 2, Tx, wire B Input Yellow/White
2W --- ---
23 TA3 4W Channel 3, Tx, wire A Input Green/White
2W --- ---
24 TB3 4W Channel 3, Tx, wire B Input Blue/White
2W --- ---
25 TA4 4W Channel 4, Tx, wire A Input Violet/White
2W --- ---
26 TB4 4W Channel 4, Tx, wire B Input Light Gray/White
2W --- ---
27 TA5 4W Channel 5, Tx, wire A Input Red/Brown
2W --- ---
28 TB5 4W Channel 5, Tx, wire B Yellow/Brown
29 TA6 4W Channel 6, Tx, wire A Orange/Brown
30 TB6 4W Channel 6, Tx, wire B Green/Brown
31 E4 Any Channel 4, E Output Blue/Brown
32 M4 Any Channel 4, M Input Violet/Brown
33 E5 Any Channel 5, E Output Light Gray/Brown
34 M5 Any Channel 5, M Input Pink/Brown
35 E6 Any Channel 6, E Output Brown/Red
36 M6 Any Channel 6, M Input Light Gray/Red

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: The number of wires used depends on the mode of

each channel. All 18 pairs of wires are used for the
SM_EM_24W6E module if all channels are in four-wire
E&M mode.
Connection Data for SM_V35E Interfaces

The SM_V35E/SM_V35U_E supports two channels of V.35 interface. Each
channel has 16 wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
Table A-20: SM_10E SM_V35E connector, pin assignment

1 CH1# RD- (104b) Ch1# receive data - Output Brown
2 CH1# RD+ (104a) Ch1# receive data + Output Brown/Black
3 CH1# RC- (115b) Ch1# receive timing - Output Red
4 CH1# RC+ (115a) Ch1# receive timing + Output Red/Black
5 CH1# TMC- (113b) Ch1# terminal timing - Input Orange
6 CH1# TMC+ (113a) Ch1# terminal timing + Input Orange/Black
7 CH2# RD- (104b) Ch2# receive data - Output Yellow
8 CH2# RD+ (104a) Ch2# receive data + Output Yellow/Black
9 CH2# RC- (115b) Ch2# receive timing - Output Green
10 CH2# RC+ (115a) Ch2# receive timing + Output Green/black
11 CH2# TMC- (113b) Ch2# terminal timing - Input Blue
12 CH2# TMC+ (113a) Ch2# terminal timing + Input Blue/Black
13 CH2# CTS (106) Ch2# clear to send Output Violet
14 CH2# DSR (107) Ch2# data set ready Output Violet/Black
15 CH1# DCD(109) Ch1# data carrier detect Output White
16 CH2# DCD(109) Ch2# data carrier detect Output White/Black
17 GND Signal ground --- Pink
18 GND Signal ground --- Pink/Black
19 CH1# TD- (103b) Ch1# transmit data - Input Brown/White
20 CH1# TD+ (103a) Ch1# transmit data + Input Red/White
21 CH1# TC- (114b) Ch1# transmit timing - Output Orange/White
22 CH1# TC+ (114a) Ch1# transmit timing + Output Yellow/White
23 CH1# CTS (106) Ch1# clear to send Output Green/White
24 CH1# DSR (107) Ch1# data set ready Output Blue/White

Maintenance Manual

25 CH2# TD- (103b) Ch2# transmit data - Input Violet/White
26 CH2# TD+ (103a) Ch2# transmit data + Input Light Gray/White
27 CH2# TC- (114b) Ch2# transmit timing - Output Red/Brown
28 CH2# TC+ (114a) Ch2# transmit timing + Output Yellow/Brown
29 CH1# RTS (105) Ch1# request to send Input Orange/Brown
30 --- --- --- ---
31 CH2# RTS (105) Ch2# request to send Input Blue/Brown
32 --- --- --- ---
33 CH1# DTR (108) Ch1# data terminal ready Input Light
Gray/Brown
35 CH2# DTR (108) Ch2# data terminal ready Input Brown/Red
Connection Data for SM_V24E Interfaces

The SM_V24E module supports the following three modes:
 8 x V.24 transparent without control signals
 4 x V.24 asynchronous mode with control signals
 2 x V.24 synchronous mode with control signals
In 8 x V.24 transparent mode, the SM_V24E supports eight channels. Each
channel has three wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 8 x V.24 transparent mode. This
table also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the
cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector
and a distribution frame.
Table A-21: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24 transparent
without controls mode

13 CH7# SD(103) Ch7# transmit data Input Violet
14 CH7# RD(104) Ch7# receive data Output Violet/Black
15 CH8# SD(103) Ch8# transmit data Input White
16 CH8# RD(104) Ch8# receive data Output White/Black
17 GND Signal ground --- Pink
18 GND Signal ground --- Pink/Black
19 CH1# SD(103) Ch1# transmit data Input Brown/White
20 CH1# RD(104) Ch1# receive data Output Red/White

Maintenance Manual

21 CH2# SD(103) Ch2# transmit data Input Orange/White
22 CH2# RD(104) Ch2# receive data Output Yellow/White
23 CH3# SD(103) Ch3# transmit data Input Green/White
24 CH3# RD(104) Ch3# receive data Output Blue/White
25 CH4# SD(103) Ch4# transmit data Input Violet/White
26 CH4# RD(104) Ch4# receive data Output Light Gray/White
27 CH5# SD(103) Ch5# transmit data Input Red/Brown
28 CH5# RD(104) Ch5# receive data Output Yellow/Brown
29 CH6# SD(103) Ch6# transmit data Input Orange/Brown
30 CH6# RD(104) Ch6# receive data Output Green/Brown
31 GND Signal ground --- Blue/Brown
32 GND Signal ground --- Violet/Brown
33 GND Signal ground --- Light Gray/Brown
34 GND Signal ground --- Pink/Brown
35 GND Signal ground --- Brown/Red
36 GND Signal ground --- Light Gray/Red
In 4 x V.24 asynchronous with controls mode, the SM_V24E supports four

channels. Each channel has eight wires. The following table lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 4 x V.24
asynchronous with controls mode. This table also lists the color of the wire
Table A-22: SM_V24E connector, pin assignment

1 CH1# RTS(105) Ch1# require to send Input Brown
2 CH1# CTS(106) Ch1# clear to send Output Brown/Black
3 CH1# DTR(108) Ch1# data terminal Input Red
ready
4 CH1# DSR(107) Ch1# data set ready Output Red/Black
5 CH1# DCD(109) Ch1# data carrier detect Output Orange
6 CH3# DCD(109) Ch3# data carrier detect Output Orange/Black
7 CH2# RTS(105) Ch2# require to send Input Yellow
8 CH2# CTS(106) Ch2# clear to send Output Yellow/Black
9 CH2# DTR(108) Ch2# data terminal Input Green
ready
10 CH2# DSR(107) Ch2# data set ready Output Green/Black
11 CH2# DCD(109) Ch2# data carrier detect Output Blue

Maintenance Manual

12 CH4# DCD(109) Ch4# data carrier detect Output Blue/Black
13 CH4# RTS(105) Ch4# require to send Input Violet
14 CH4# CTS(106) Ch4# clear to send Output Violet/Black
15 CH4# DTR(108) Ch4# data terminal Input White
ready
16 CH4# DSR(107) Ch4# data set ready Output White/Black
19 CH1# SD(103) Ch1# transmit data Input Brown/White
20 CH1# RD(104) Ch1# receive data Output Red/White
21 CH2# SD(103) Ch2# transmit data Input Orange/White
22 CH2# RD(104) Ch2# receive data Output Yellow/White
23 CH3# SD(103) Ch3# transmit data Input Green/White
24 CH3# RD(104) Ch3# receive data Output Blue/White
25 CH4# SD(103) Ch4# transmit data Input Violet/White
26 CH4# RD(104) Ch4# receive data Output Light Gray/White
27 CH3# RTS(105) Ch3# require to send Input Red/Brown
28 CH3# CTS(106) Ch3# clear to send Output Yellow/Brown
29 CH3# DTR(108) Ch3# data terminal read Input Orange/Brown
30 CH3# DSR(107) Ch3# data set ready Output Green/Brown
33 SG1 Signal ground --- Light Gray/Brown
34 SG2 Signal ground --- Pink/Brown
35 SG3 Signal ground --- Brown/Red
36 SG4 Signal ground --- Light Gray/Red

Maintenance Manual
In 2 x V.24 synchronous with controls mode, the SM_V24E supports two

channels. Each channel has eleven wires. The following table lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 2 x V.24
synchronous with controls mode. This table also lists the color of the wire

synchronous with controls mode

1 CH1# RTS(105) Ch1# require to send Input Brown
2 CH1# CTS(106) Ch1# clear to send Output Brown/Black
3 CH1# DTR(108) Ch1# data terminal ready Input Red
4 CH1# DSR(107) Ch1# data set ready Output Red/Black
5 CH1# DCD(109) Ch1# data carrier detect Output Orange
6 CH1# RC(115) Ch1# receive timing Output Orange/Black
7 CH2# RTS(105) Ch2# require to send Input Yellow
8 CH2# CTS(106) Ch2# clear to send Output Yellow/Black
9 CH2# DTR(108) Ch2# data terminal ready Input Green
10 CH2# DSR(107) Ch2# data set ready Output Green/Black
11 CH2# DCD(109) Ch2# data carrier detect Output Blue
12 CH2# RC(115) Ch2# receive timing Output Blue/Black
13-18 --- Not connected --- ---
19 CH1# SD(103) CH1# transmit data Brown/White
20 CH1# RD(104) CH1# receive data Output Red/White
21 CH2# SD(103) CH2# transmit data Input Orange/White
22 CH2# RD(104) CH2# receive data Output Yellow/White
23 CH1# TMC(113) Ch1# DTE timing Input Green/White
24 CH1# TC(114) Ch1# transmit timing Output Blue/White
25 CH2# TMC(113) Ch2# DTE timing Input Violet/White
26 CH2# TC(114) Ch2# transmit timing Output Light Gray/White
27-34 --- Not connected --- ---
35 SG1 Signal ground --- Brown/Red
36 SG2 Signal ground --- Light Gray/Red

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data for SM_CODIR_4E

Interfaces
The SM_CODIR_4E supports four channels of codirectional 64 Kbps interface.
Each channel has two pairs of wires. The following table lists the pin
Table A-24: SM_10E SM_CODIR_4E connector, pin assignment

1 RA1 Channel 1, Rx, wire A Input Brown
2 RB1 Channel 1, Rx, wire B Input Brown/Black
3 RA2 Channel 2, Rx, wire A Input Red
4 RB2 Channel 2, Rx, wire B Input Red/Black
5 RA3 Channel 3, Rx, wire A Input Orange
6 RB3 Channel 3, Rx, wire B Input Orange/Black
7 RA4 Channel 4, Rx, wire A Input Yellow
8 RB4 Channel 4, Rx, wire B Input Yellow/Black
9-18 --- Not connected --- ---
19 TA1 Channel 1, Tx, wire A Output Brown/White
20 TB1 Channel 1, Tx, wire B Output Red/White
21 TA2 Channel 2, Tx, wire A Output Orange/White
22 TB2 Channel 2, Tx, wire B Output Yellow/White
23 TA3 Channel 3, Tx, wire A Output Green/White
24 TB3 Channel 3, Tx, wire B Output Blue/White
25 TA4 Channel 4, Tx, wire A Output Violet/White
26 TB4 Channel 4, Tx, wire B Output Light Gray/White
27-36 --- Not connected --- ---
NOTE: Only eight of 18 pairs of wires are used for

SM_CODIR_4E interfaces.

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data for SM_OMNI_E Interfaces

The SM_OMNI_E supports four 2W/4W channels. Each channel has one pair
of wires in 2W mode, or two pairs of wires in 4W mode. The following table
lists the pin assignment for a typical connector. This table also lists the color of
the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI
Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution
frame.
Table A-25: SM_10E SM_OMNI_E connector, pin assignment

1 RA1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire A Output Brown
2 RB1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire B Output Brown/Black
3 RA2 4W Channel 2, Rx, wire A Output Red
4 RB2 4W Channel 2, Rx, wire B Output Red/Black
5 RA3 Channel 3, Rx, wire A Output Orange
Channel 3, wire A Bidirectional
6 RB3 4W Channel 3, Rx, wire B Output Orange/Black
7 RA4 Channel 4, Rx, wire A Output Yellow
Channel 4, wire A Bidirectional
8 RB4 4W Channel 4, Rx, wire B Output Yellow/Black
19 TA1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire A Input Brown/White
2W --- ---
20 TB1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire B Input Red/White
2W --- ---
21 TA2 4W Channel 2, Tx, wire A Input Orange/White
2W --- ---
22 TB2 4W Channel 2, Tx, wire B Input Yellow/White
2W --- ---

Maintenance Manual

23 TA3 4W Channel 3, Tx, wire A Input Green/White
2W --- ---
24 TB3 4W Channel 3, Tx, wire B Input Blue/White
2W --- ---
25 TA4 4W Channel 4, Tx, wire A Input Violet/White
2W --- ---
26 TB4 4W Channel 4, Tx, wire B Input Light
Gray/White
2W --- ---
27-36 --- Not connected --- ---
NOTE: Only eight of 18 pairs of wires are used for

SM_OMNI_E interfaces
ICP_VF Connection Data

A single ICP_VF can serve one of the following SM_10E modules:
 SM_FXS_8E
 SM_FXO_8E
 SM_EM_24W6E (Connectors marked with CH7 and CH8 are not
connected.)
 SM_Codir_4_E (Connectors marked with CH5 to CH8 are not connected.)
There are eight RJ-45 connectors for external interfaces on the front panel of
the ICP_VF. The figure Ethernet connector, pin identification (on page A-3)
identifies the RJ-45 connector pins as seen when looking into the connector.
The following tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector, when
serving each type of traffic module. These tables also list the color of the wire
Table A-26: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_FXS_8E or
SM_FXO_8E

1 Line A Wire A Bidirectional Blue/White ring
2 Line B Wire B Bidirectional White/Blue ring

Maintenance Manual
Table A-27: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_EM_24W6E

1 RA1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire A Output Blue/White ring
2 RB1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire B Output White/blue ring
3 TA1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire A Input Green/White ring
2W --- ---
4 TB1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire B Input White/Green ring
2W --- ---
5 --- --- --- --- Brown/White ring
6 --- --- --- --- White/Brown ring
7 E1 Any Channel 1, E Output Orange/White ring
8 M1 Any Channel 1, M Input White/Orange ring
Table A-28: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_CODIR_4E

1 RA Rx, wire A Input Blue/White ring
2 RB Rx, wire B Input White/Blue ring
3 TA Tx, wire A Output Green/White ring
4 TB Tx, wire B Output White/Green ring

Maintenance Manual
ICP_V24 Connection Data

V.24 interfaces in the SM_V24E are always in DCE mode. One ICP_V24 can
serve one SM_V24E module. The SM_V24E module can work in the
following three modes:
 Eight channels of transparent without controls mode (Connectors marked
with SYNC CH1 and SYNC CH2 are not connected.)
 Four channels of asynchronous with controls mode (Connectors marked
with SYNC CH1 and SYNC CH2 are not connected. Connectors marked
with CH5 to CH8 are not connected.)
 Two channels of synchronous with controls mode (Connectors marked with
CH1 to CH8 are not connected.)
There are two types of connectors for external interfaces on the front panel of
the ICP_V24:
 25-pin D-type male connector for synchronous V.24 interfaces
 9-pin D-type male connector for transparent or asynchronous V.24
interfaces
The following figure identifies the 25-pin D-type male connector pins as seen
when looking into the connector. The following table lists the connector pin
Figure A-16: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification
Table A-29: ICP_V24 synchronous V.24 25-pin D-type connector, pin assignment

2 SD (103) Transmit data Input Brown
3 RD (104) Receive data Output Brown/Gray ring
4 RTS (105) Request to send Input Red
5 CTS (106) Clear to send Output Red/Gray ring
6 DSR(107) Data set ready Output Orange
7 GND Signal ground --- Orange/Gray ring
8 DCD(109) Data carrier detect Output Yellow

Maintenance Manual

15 TC (114) Transmit timing --- ---
17 RC (115) Receive timing --- ---
20 DTR(108) Data terminal ready Input Green/Gray ring
24 TMC (113) DTE timing Input Blue
The following figure identifies the 9-pin D-type male connector pins as seen
when looking into the connector. The following tables list the pin assignment
for a typical connector in asynchronous with controls mode and transparent
without controls mode. These tables also list the color of the wire connected to
the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting
Figure A-17: 9-pin D-type male connector, pin identification
Table A-30: ICP_V24 asynchronous V.24 9-pin D-type connector, pin assignment

1 DCD(109) Data carrier detect Output Blue/White ring
2 SD (103) Transmit data Input White/Blue ring
3 RD (104) Receive data Output Orange/White ring
4 DTR(108) Data terminal ready Input White/Orange ring
5 GND Signal ground --- White/Green ring
6 DSR(107) Data set ready Output Green/White ring
7 CTS (106) Clear to send Output Brown/White ring
8 RTS (105) Request to send Input White/Brown ring

Maintenance Manual
Table A-31: ICP_V24 transparent V.24 9-pin D-type connector, pin assignment

2 SD (103) Transmit data Input Brown
3 RD (104) Receive data Output Brown/Black
5 GND Receive data --- Red
ICP_V35 Connection Data

V.35 interfaces in the SM_V35E are always in DCE mode. One ICP_V35 can
serve a single SM_V35E module. There are two M34 female connectors for
external interfaces on the front panel of the ICP_V35.
The following figure identifies the M34 female connector pins as seen when
looking into the connector. The following table lists the connector pin
Figure A-18: M34 female connector, pin identification
Table A-32: ICP_V35 M34 female connector, pin assignment

A CGND(101) Case ground --- Brown
B GND(102) Signal ground --- Brown/Gray ring
C RTS (105) Request to send Input Red
D CTS (106) Clear to send Output Red/Gray ring
E DSR(107) Data set ready Output Orange
F DCD(109) Data carrier detect Output Orange/Gray ring
H DTR(108) Data terminal ready Input Yellow

Maintenance Manual

P TD+(103a) Transmit data + Input Green
S TD-(103b) Transmit data - Input Green/Gray ring
R RD+(104a) Receive data + Output Blue
T RD-(104b) Receive data - Output Blue/Gray ring
U TMC+(113a) Terminal clock + Input Violet
W TMC-(113b) Terminal clock - Input Violet/Gray ring
V RC+ (115a) Receive clock + Output White
X RC- (115b) Receive clock - Output White/Gray ring
Y TC+(114a) Transmit clock + Output Pink
AA TC-(114b) Transmit clock - Output Pink/Gray ring
RAP-4B Connectors
SHELF ALARM Connectors
The four ALARMS connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each
connector can be connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM platform or
to a BG platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen
when looking into the connector).
Figure A-19: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin identification
The following table lists the pin assignment for this connector.
Table A-33: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment
Pin Name Function Direction

1 N/C -- --
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire Input
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, - wire Input

Maintenance Manual
Pin Name Function Direction

10 N/C -- --
11 N/C -- --
12 GND Ground --
13 ALM_O1 Alarm output 1 common Output
14 N/C -- --
15 GND Ground --
16 ALM_O2 Alarm output 2 common Output
17 N/C -- --
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input
19 N/C -- --
20 GND Ground --
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common --
22 N/C -- --
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input
24 GND Ground --
25 N/C -- --
26 GND Ground --
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input
28 N/C -- --
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common --
30 GND Ground --
31 N/C -- --
32 N/C -- --
33 N/C -- --
34 N/C -- --
35 GND Ground --
36 N/C -- --

Maintenance Manual
ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries
three groups of lines to the customer equipment:
 Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the
BroadGate shelves. Four inputs are allocated to each BroadGate platform.
Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the
customer's facility.
 Eight sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform
ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight
relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each BroadGate platform
connected to the RAP-4B.
 Four sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform
ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays,
identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the
corresponding alarm relays of BroadGate shelves.
Relay contact ratings are 57.6 V in open state, and 1A in closed state.
The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen
Figure A-20: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification
The following table lists the pin assignment for the ALARM IN/OUT
connector.
Table A-34: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment

Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color
Shelf 1 1 ALM_01NO Output relay 1, normally open Output Black
contact
2 ALM_01COM Output relay 1, common Output Brown
contact
3 ALM_01NC Output relay 1, normally Output Red
closed contact
4 ALM_02NO Output relay 2, normally open Output Orange
contact
5 ALM_02COM Output relay 2, common Output Yellow
contact
6 ALM_02NC Output relay 2, normally Output Green
closed contact

Maintenance Manual

Shelf 2 7 ALM_03NO Output relay 3, normally open Output Blue
contact
8 ALM_03COM Output relay 3, common Output Violet
contact
9 ALM_03NC Output relay 3, normally Output Gray
closed contact
10 ALM_04NO Output relay 4, normally open Output White
contact
11 ALM_04COM Output relay 4, common Output Pink
contact
12 ALM_04NC Output relay 4, normally Output Light Green
closed contact
Shelf 3 13 ALM_05NO Output relay 5, normally open Output Black/White
contact
14 ALM_05COM Output relay 5, common Output Brown/White
contact
15 ALM_05NC Output relay 5, normally Output Red/White
closed contact
16 ALM_06NO Output relay 6, normally open Output Orange/White
contact
17 ALM_06COM Output relay 6, common Output Green/White
contact
18 ALM_06NC Output relay 6, normally Output Blue/White
closed contact
Shelf 4 19 ALM_07NO Output relay 7, normally open Output Violet/White
contact
20 ALM_07COM Output relay 7, common Output Red/Black
contact
21 ALM_07NC Output relay 7, normally Output Orange/Black
closed contact
22 ALM_08NO Output relay 8, normally open Output Yellow/Black
contact
23 ALM_08COM Output relay 8, common Output Green/Black
contact
24 ALM_08NC Output relay 8, normally Output Gray/Black
closed contact

Maintenance Manual

All shelves 25 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, normally Output Pink/Black
closed contact
26 CRIT_NO Critical alarm relay, normally Output Pink/Green
open contact
27 CRIT_COM Critical alarm relay, common Output Pink/Red
contact
28 MAJ_NC Major alarm relay, normally Output Pink/Violet
closed contact
29 MAJ_NO Major alarm relay, normally Output Light Blue
open contact
30 MAJ_COM Major alarm relay, common Output Light Blue/Brown
contact
31 MIN_NC Minor alarm relay, normally Output Light Blue/Red
closed contact
32 MIN_NO Minor alarm relay, normally Output Light Blue/Violet
open contact
33 MIN_COM Minor alarm relay, common Output Light Blue/Black
contact
34 WARN_COM Warning alarm relay, Output Gray/Green
common contact
Shelf 1 35 ALMIN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Red
36 ALM_IN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Violet
37 ALMIN2 External alarm input 2 Input Light Green/Black
38 ALM_IN2 External alarm input 2 Input Violet/Black
39 ALMIN3 External alarm input 3 Input Black/White dots
40 ALM_IN3 External alarm input 3 Input Brown/White dots
41 ALMIN4 External alarm input 4 Input Red/White dots
42 ALM_IN4 External alarm input 4 Input Orange/White dots
Shelf 2 43 ALMIN5 External alarm input 5 Input Green/White dots

44 ALM_IN5 External alarm input 5 Input Blue/White dots
45 ALMIN6 External alarm input 6 Input Violet/White dots
46 ALM_IN6 External alarm input 6 Input White/Black dots
47 ALMIN7 External alarm input 7 Input Yellow/Black dots
48 ALM_IN7 External alarm input 7 Input Green/Black dots
49 ALMIN8 External alarm input 8 Input Light Blue/Black dots
50 ALM_IN8 External alarm input 8 Input Pink/Black dots

Maintenance Manual

Shelf 3 51 ALMIN9 External alarm input 9 Input Red/Black dots
52 ALM_IN9 External alarm input 9 Input Orange/Black dots
53 ALMIN10 External alarm input 10 Input Violet/Black dots
54 ALM_IN10 External alarm input 10 Input Gray/Black dots
55 ALMIN11 External alarm input 11 Input
56 ALM_IN11 External alarm input 11 Input Orange/Red dots
57 ALMIN12 External alarm input 12 Input Yellow/Red dots
58 ALM_IN12 External alarm input 12 Input Green/Red dots
Shelf 4 59 ALMIN13 External alarm input 13 Input Violet/Red dots

60 ALM_IN13 External alarm input 13 Input Gray/Red dots
61 ALMIN14 External alarm input 14 Input White/Red dots
62 ALM_IN14 External alarm input 14 Input Pink/Red dots
63 ALMIN15 External alarm input 15 Input Yellow/White
64 ALM_IN15 External alarm input 15 Input Gray/White
65 ALMIN16 External alarm input 16 Input Pink/White
66 ALM_IN16 External alarm input 16 Input Brown/Black
All shelves 67 WARN_NC Warning alarm relay, Output Blue/Black

normally closed contact
68 WARN_NO Warning alarm relay, Output Gray/White dots
normally open contact

Maintenance Manual

B
Rack Installation
In this appendix:
Installing Equipment Racks ............................................................................ B-1
19" Rack Installation ...................................................................................... B-7
Installing Equipment Racks

NOTE: The instructions in this Appendix are relevant to the
installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended that
BG-30 shelves be installed in ETSI A racks.
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary B-1

Rack Installation BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
Rack Floor Marking

You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack.
Before you start:

Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.
If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do so
now (see Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (on page 3-5)).
To mark out the rack floor plan:

1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the
floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
 ETSI A and ETSI B racks: Use template of diagram a. in the figure
"Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden
Floors (on page B-4)).
 23” rack: Use template of diagram a. in the figure "Mounting diagrams
for 19” and 23” racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (on page
B-4)).
 19” rack: Use template of diagram b. in the figure "Mounting diagrams
for 19” and 23” racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (on page
B-4)).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.
2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also
mark out all cable entry slots.
3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for
equipment bolting.
B-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Rack Installation
Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation on Concrete Floors

This section describes how to install racks on concrete floors.
To mount the rack on a concrete floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template. See diagram a. in the figure "Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks",
and diagram a. or b. in the figure "Mounting diagrams for 19” and 23”
racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (on page B-4)).
2. Insert expansion shields into the holes.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in
accordance with diagram b. or diagram c. in the figure "Mounting diagrams
for 19” and 23” racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (on page B-
4)).

Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation on Wooden Floors

This section describes how to install racks on wooden floors.
To mount the rack on a wooden floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (see the following figures), using a 5 mm drill bit.
3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see the
following figures).
Figure B-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks

Maintenance Manual
Figure B-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks
Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended)

Floors
This section describes how to install racks on floating (suspended) floors.
To mount the rack on a floating (suspended) floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor, in accordance
with the appropriate template.
3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c. in the figure
"Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors
(on page B-4)).

Maintenance Manual
Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly

This section describes how to install racks on a suspended overhead tray.
To mount the rack on a suspended overhead tray:

1. Refer to the suspended overhead tray diagram (see the following figure)
and position the overhead rack securing brackets.
2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets.
2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks
are generally attached only to the ceiling.
Figure B-3: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead

tray (2200 mm rack)
Installing Extendable Rails

In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the
rack using the extendable installation rails available from ECI Telecom.
In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before
installing the equipment.
Rack Grounding
Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the
prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar.
Use a grounding lead that meets the requirements described in Rack Grounding
Requirements.

Maintenance Manual
19" Rack Installation

The BG-30 can also be installed in European 19” racks. This is accepted under
the limitations that the rack’s general dimensions are according to the
following figure. Any other European 19” rack must first be examined and
approved by ECI Telecom.
Figure B-4: Example of an approved European 19” rack

Maintenance Manual

Index
getting started overview • 2-1
2
installation • 2-7, 3-1
2 Mbps test • 5-6 installation options • 3-6
3 installation overview • 2-1
installation plan • 2-7
34 Mbps test • 5-6
installation sequence • 3-2
4 integrating with other equipment in
45 Mbps test • 5-6 one rack • 2-9
introduction • 1-1
A
maintenance overview • 6-1
AC_CONV_30B physical location • 2-5
connection data • A-2 platform overview • 1-1
AC_CONV_30E power cables • 2-11
connection data • A-2 power sources • 2-6
AC_CONV_MODULE SDH commissioning tests • 5-6
installing • 3-48 site commisssioning tests • 5-2
AC_CONV_UNIT site preparation • 2-4
installing • 3-48 typical installation • 2-8
Alarm Cables • 2-12 unpacking • 3-5
connecting • 3-65 visual inspection • 3-5
Alarm-Handling Test • 5-11 BG-30B
Alarms attaching in rack • 3-34
connection data • A-10 grounding • 3-34
Ancillary Units • 3-8 installing • 3-32
B installing FCU_30B • 3-38
installing power modules • 3-37
BG-30
installing Tslot modules • 3-47
commissioning tests • 5-1
installing XIO30 • 3-46
connecting electrical interface cables
• 3-68 slot identification • 3-35
connecting fibers nd cables • 3-65 BG-30E
connection data • A-1 attaching to rack • 3-55
data network commissioning tests • 5- installing • 3-50
13 installing extension cards • 3-59
environmental requirements • 2-4 installing FCU_30E • 3-58
equipment installation • 3-1 installing on BG-30B shelf • 3-52
getting started • 2-1 installing power modules • 3-57
426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary I-1

Index BG-30 Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
C ICP_V35 • A-45
Cables • 2-10 ICP_VF • A-41
alarm • 2-12 INF_30B • A-2
coaxial • 3-73 INF_30E • A-2
connecting to BG-30 • 3-65 MNG Ethernet • A-3
data interface • 3-82 MPS_2G_8F • A-24
DC power • 2-11 orderwire • A-8
electric traffic • 2-13 overview • A-2
electrical • 3-68 P345_3E • A-23
grounding • 2-11 PE1_63 • A-23
management • 2-12 PM345_3 • A-23
RAP input power • 2-11 PME1_21 • A-11
shelf power • 2-12 RS-232 • A-7
timing • 2-13 SM_10E • A-30
Checking SM_CODIR_4E • A-39
cards installed • 5-2 SM_EM_24W6E • A-32
modules installed • 5-2 SM_FXO_8E • A-31
Cleaning Optical Connectors • 2-6 SM_FXS_8E • A-31
Commissioning Tests • 5-1 SM_V24E • A-35
Connecting SM_V35E • A-34
alarm cables • 3-65 T3/T4 • A-4
coaxial cables • 3-73 V.11 overhead • A-9
data interface cables to Ethernet D
interfaces • 3-82
Data Network Commissioning Tests •
E1 cables for balanced E1 interfaces • 5-13
3-68
DC
E1 cables for unbalanced E1
power cables • 2-11
interfaces • 3-69
electrical cables • 3-82 E
electrical interface cables • 3-68 ElectricTraffic Cables • 2-13
fibers • 3-65 Environmental Requirements • 2-4
optical fibers • 3-66 Equipment
optical modules • 3-66 safety • 2-17
power cables • 3-65 Equipment Installation • 3-1
timing cables • 3-83 Equipment Power-on Test • 5-8
Connection Data • A-1 ESD Protection • 2-23
alarms • A-10 Eslot
auxiliary connector on MCP30 • A-5 replacing • 6-29
ESW_2G_8F_E • A-24 ESW_2G_8F_E
Ethernet • A-23 connection data • A-24
ICP_V24 • A-43 installing SFP modules • 3-63
I-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Index
Maintenance Manual
Ethernet Interfaces • 3-82 INF_30B

connection data • A-23 connection data • A-2
Extension Cards • 3-59 INF_30E
F connection data • A-2
Input Sensitivity Test • 5-8
FCU_30B/FCU_30BH Installation • 2-7
installing • 3-38 AC_CONV_MODULE • 3-48
replacing • 6-32 AC_CONV_UNIT • 3-31
FCU_30E ancillary units in racks • 3-8
installing • 3-58 BG-30 in racks • 2-7
replacing • 6-32 BG-30B • 3-32
Fiber Storage Tray BG-30B power modules • 3-37
installing • 3-23 BG-30E • 3-50
Fibers • 2-10 BG-30E on BG-30B shelf • 3-52
connecting to BG-30 • 3-65 BG-30E power modules • 3-57
optical • 2-15 extendable rails on rack • B-6
Frame Loss-Rate • 5-14 extension cards in BG-30E • 3-59
G FCU_30B/FCU_30BH • 3-38
Grounding FCU_30E • 3-58
BG-30B • 3-34 fiber storage tray • 3-23
cables • 2-11 H connector • 3-51
rack • B-6 MCP30 • 3-39
rack requirements • 2-18 ODF • 3-25
requirements • 2-18 options • 3-6
overview • 2-1
H plan • 2-7
H connector preliminary preparations • 3-2
installing • 3-51 rack • B-1
I rail stiffeners • 3-33
RAP-BG • 3-9
ICP_MCP30
sequence • 3-2
installing • 3-29
SFP module • 3-49
replacing • 6-32
SFP module in ESW_2G_8F_E •
ICP_V24 3-63
connection data • A-43 traffic modules on SM_10E • 3-64
ICP_V35 Tslot modules • 3-47
connection data • A-45 typical BG-30 • 2-8
ICP_VF xDDF-21 • 3-28
connection data • A-41 XIO30 • 3-46
ICPs Integration of Equipment in a Rack • 2-9
replacing • 6-31

Maintenance Manual
L Orderwire
Laser connection data • A-8
classification • 2-20 P
device operation precautions • 2-21 P345_3E
information • 2-21 connection data • A-23
safety statutory warning • 2-20 Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test •
warning labels • 2-20 5-9
Laser Safety • 2-20 PE1_63
Loss of Signal Detection Test • 5-7 connection data • A-23
M Personnel Training • 2-24
Physical Location of BG-30 • 2-5
Maintenance • 6-1
Platform Overview • 1-1
preventive • 6-2
PM345_3
Maintenance Action Test • 5-12
connection data • A-23
Management Cables • 2-12
PME1_21 • A-11
MCP30
PME1_63
installing • 3-39
Power
replacing • 6-27
BG-30E • 3-57
Measuring Optical Levels • 5-4
connecting cables • 3-65
Mechanical Checks • 5-3
installing power modules in BG-30B
MNG Ethernet
• 3-37
replacing modules • 6-31
Modules troubleshooting • 6-4
replacing • 6-25 Power Sources • 2-6
MPS_2G_8F
Preparing
cables • 2-10
N fibers • 2-10
Network Timing Synchronization Test • Preventive Maintenance • 6-2
5-7 R
O Rack
ODF 19 • B-7
installing • 3-25 floor marking • B-2
Optical grounding • B-6
measuring levels • 5-4 installation • B-1
Optical Connectors installation on concrete floors • B-3
cleaning • 2-6 installation on floating floors • B-5
Optical Fibers • 2-15 installation on wooden floors • B-4
connecting • 3-66 installing extendable rails • B-6
Optical Modules mounting on suspended overhead tray
connecting • 3-66 • B-6

BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Index
Maintenance Manual
Rack Grounding Requirements • 2-18 SFP

Rail Stiffeners installing • 3-49
installing • 3-33 installing in ESW_2G_8F_E • 3-63
RAP replacing • 6-33
input power cables • 2-11 Shelf Power-on Test • 5-5
installing • 3-9 Site Commissinig Tests • 5-2
RAP-4B Site Preparation • 2-4
installation • 3-16 SM_10E
RAP-BG • 3-9 connection data • A-30
Replacing installing traffic modules • 3-64
Eslot cards • 6-29 replacing ICPs • 6-31
FCU module • 6-32 replacing traffic modules • 6-30
ICP for MCP30 • 6-32 SM_CODIR_4E
ICPs for SM_10E • 6-31 connection data • A-39
MCP30 • 6-27 SM_EM_24W6E
modules • 6-25 connection data • A-32
power modules • 6-31 SM_FXO_8E
SFP/XFP transceivers • 6-33 connection data • A-31
traffic modules on SM_10E • 6-30 SM_FXS_8E
Tslot cards • 6-29 connection data • A-31
XIO30 • 6-28 SM_V24E
Reset Test • 5-14 connection data • A-35
Routing SM_V35E
coaxial cables • 3-73 connection data • A-34
data interface cables to Ethernet Stability Test • 5-15
interfaces • 3-82 Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly •
E1 cables for balanced E1 interfaces • B-6
3-68 System Recovery Test • 5-14
E1 cables for unbalanced E1
interfaces • 3-69
T
electrical cables • 3-82 T3/T4
electrical interface cables • 3-68 connection data • A-4
RS-232 Temporary EPA • 2-25
connection data • A-7 working within • 2-26
Test Equipment • 5-1
S
Tests
Safety • 2-17, 6-25 alarm-handling • 5-11
laser • 2-20 commissioning • 5-6
SDH Commissioning Tests • 5-6 data network commisssioning • 5-13
SDH Test • 5-6 equipment • 2-6, 5-1, 6-1
Sevirity Assignment Test • 5-10 equipment power-on • 5-5

Maintenance Manual
equipment setup • 5-6 Tools and Test Equipment • 2-6

frame loss-rate • 5-14 Traffic Stability Test • 5-9
input sensitivity • 5-8 Transmission Alarm-handling Test • 5-11
loss of signal detection • 5-7 Troubleshooting • 6-3
maintenance actions • 5-12 power problems • 6-4
network timing synchronization • 5-7 Tslot • 3-47
path protection and nonretrieval • 5-9 replacing • 6-29
reset • 5-14 U
SDH • 5-6
SDH commissioning • 5-6 Unpacking and Visual Inspection • 3-5
severity assignment • 5-10 V
shelf power-on • 5-5 V.11 Overhead
site commissioning • 5-2 connection data • A-9
stability • 5-15 Visual Inspection • 5-3
system recovery • 5-14
throughput and latency • 5-13
X
traffic stability • 5-9 xDDF-21
transmission alarm handling • 5-11 installing • 3-28
2 Mbps • 5-6 XIO30
34 Mbps • 5-6 installing in BG-30B • 3-46
45 Mbps • 5-6 replacing • 6-28
Throughput and Latency Test • 5-13
Timing Cable • 2-13
connecting • 3-83

Broadgate Bg-30: Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Broadgate Bg-30: Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Broadgate Bg-30: Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BroadGate® BG-30

Installation, Operation, and

© Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2002-2011. All rights reserved worldwide.

Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1

Equipment Installation ............................................................ 3-1

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary i

BG-30B Wall-Mounted Installations ....................................... 4-1

Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-1

Maintenance ............................................................................. 6-1

ii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

Connection Data ..................................................................... A-1

Rack Installation ..................................................................... B-1

Index .......................................................................................... I-1

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iii

iv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary v

vi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

Figure 4-5: Installing the rear panel ............................................................................... 4-6

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vii

Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification ......................................... A-7

viii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary ix

Table 6-7: General troubleshooting procedures for the INF_30B/INF_30BH

x ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

Table A-21: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xi

xii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xiii

NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

LASER WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates

ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on

xiv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information

IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xv

ECI Telecom's BroadGate® and XDM® product lines are

xvi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

BG-30 Platform Overview

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-1

 Multi-ADM and cross-connect functionality, ideal for deployment in

Figure 1-1: Typical BG-30 shelf

1-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-1

Outline of the Installation Procedure

Table 2-1: Typical BG-30 equipment installation sequence

No. Task Reference

2-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

No. Task Reference

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-3

Table 2-2: Environmental requirements

Parameter Compliance requirements

2-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 426006-2333-013-A03

WARNING: BG-30 shelves are intended for installation in

Before you start:

Table 2-3: Equipment dimensions

426006-2333-013-A03 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-5